JP7297281B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Among conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine in which a unit integrated with a winning opening such as a general winning opening and other members is arranged at the bottom of a game board (see, for example, Patent Document 1). .

JP 2018-043082 A

By the way, the player never looked at the unit.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a unit that can be watched by a player.

According to a representative aspect of the present invention, in a gaming machine that includes a unit having a decorative portion and generates a special game state when a game results in a special result, the type of the special game state is determined by a plurality of light emitting units. and a display unit that displays a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the lights, and the decoration unit includes a lighting state diagram showing the combination and information representing the number of rounds of the special game state corresponding to the combination. A corresponding diagram is displayed, and in the correspondence diagram, information indicating the same number of rounds is displayed for a plurality of the lighting state diagrams showing the different combinations.

According to one aspect of the present invention, a player can be made to look at a unit.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from diagonally upper right. It is the front view which looked at the gaming machine from the front. It is the left side view which looked at the gaming machine from the left. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is the perspective view (a) seen from diagonally upper right of a lower tray unit, and the perspective view (b) seen from diagonally upper left. They are a top view (a) of the lower tray unit, a cross-sectional view (b) taken along line AA, and enlarged cross-sectional views (c) and (d). Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the glass frame excluding the decoration device (top unit); Front view (a) of the glass frame excluding the decoration device (top unit), cross-sectional view (b) taken along line AA, front view (c) and rear view (d) of the glass frame excluding speaker decoration members. is. It is an enlarged sectional view (a) of a sound output part, and the figure (b) which shows how the sound output from the upper speaker propagates. It is a perspective view of the game machine seen from the right diagonal. They are the side view (a) of the speaker decoration member in the state attached to the game machine, and the perspective view (b) which looked at the speaker decoration member from the diagonal upper left. It is the front view (a) of a speaker decoration member, and the perspective view (b) which looked at the speaker decoration member from the right side. It is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame. They are the front view (a) and perspective view (b) of a ball launcher, and the perspective view (c) of a cutting blade. It is the front view (a) and exploded perspective view (b) of a foul ball catching unit. It is the back view (a) of a foul ball catching unit, and the perspective view (b) of the back side. FIG. 4A is a horizontal cross-sectional view (line AA) of the foul ball catching unit, and FIG. 4B is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the part member. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the foul ball catching unit as seen obliquely from above. It is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame with the foul ball catching unit removed. It is the perspective view (a) of the upper tray unit of the state which removed the production|presentation button unit from the upper tray unit main body, and the top view (b) of the upper tray unit. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper tray unit (upper tray unit main body). It is an exploded perspective view of a production button unit (production button). They are the front view (a) and perspective view (b) of a production button unit (production button). It is the top view (a) which looked at the production|presentation button unit (production|production button) from upper direction, and the perspective view (b) which removes and shows the production|presentation button unit and the button installation part of the right side in an operation panel. Front view (a) of the upper tray unit, cross-sectional view (b) of the cross section taken along the line AA of the front view (a) seen from the side, and an enlarged view of the main part of the cross-sectional view (b) (c). A top view of the upper tray unit (similar to FIG. 18(b)), a cross-sectional view (a) taken along the line AA seen from the back side, and a front view with some of the members constituting the upper tray unit removed (b). A top view of the upper tray unit (similar to FIG. 18(b)) A cross-sectional view (a) seen from the front of the cross section taken along the line AA, and an enlarged view (b) of the main part of the cross-sectional view (a). ). A right enlarged view (a) showing an enlarged right side of a diametrically cut cross section of the effect button unit and its surroundings, a left enlarged view (b) showing an enlarged left side of the essential part, and a button. It is the top view (c) and (d) which show the principal part of a base. It is a front view explaining a discharge port. They are the back view (a) and cross-sectional top view (b) of an outer unit (or front frame). 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer unit (or front frame); FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the spherical channel unit; It is the back view (a) and perspective front view (b) of a spherical flow-path unit base. They are the right side view (a) of a glass frame, its partial enlarged view (b), and the perspective view (c) seen from the lower diagonal of a glass frame, and its partially enlarged view (d). It is the disassembled perspective view (a) which isolate|separated the protrusion production|presentation unit (decoration apparatus) from the glass frame, and the exploded perspective view (b) of a protrusion production|presentation unit. It is a front view of a projecting production unit. It is a front view (normal game state) of the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment (a state suggesting a specific mode); It is a front view (specific game state) of the game board of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Fig. 38(a) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion rotates during fluctuation, Fig. 38(b) shows a lighting mode in which two lighting states are alternately repeated during fluctuation, FIG. 38(c) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion changes like drawing a figure 8 when fluctuating. FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram of the general winning opening unit and the collective display device, FIG. 39(b) is a detailed drawing of the collective display device, and FIG. FIG. 39(d) shows a schematic diagram of the positional information and related information displayed on the sticker. 40(a-1) shows an example of a normal game state, and FIG. FIG. 40(a-1) shows an example of when the falling accessory unit operates, FIG. 40(b-1) shows an example of when a specific mode is suggested, and FIG. 2) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40(b-1), FIG. 40(c-1) shows an example in a specific game state, and FIG. 40(c-2). ) respectively show examples in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40(c-1). It is an exploded perspective view of a movable accessory. It is a detailed exploded perspective view of the movable accessory. 4 is an exploded view of a biasing member unit that constitutes the main body of the movable accessory. FIG. Fig. 44(a) is a perspective view showing the operation of the lower movable part that guides the movement of the movable accessory main body, Fig. 44(a) is when the biasing member is in the initial state, and Fig. 44(b) is when the biasing member is extended. , respectively. It is a front view (initial position) of a movable accessory main body. 46 is a rear view of FIG. 45; FIG. It is a front view (intermediate position) of the movable accessory main body. 48 is a rear view of FIG. 47; FIG. It is a front view (maximum position) of the movable accessory main body. 50 is a rear view of FIG. 49; FIG. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a sub board box that accommodates the effect control device. FIG. 4 is a front view of a box upper member to which a cover member is attached; FIG. 54 is a partial detailed view of FIG. 53 (enlarged view of the portion surrounded by the rectangular broken line in FIG. 53), in which FIG. 54(a) is a view without the cover member, and FIG. 54(b) is a view with the cover member attached FIG. 10 is a diagram of a case; FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 53 with the cover member attached, and a partial detail view thereof; FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 53 with the cover member attached, and a partial detail view thereof. It is a perspective view of a cover member. It is a back view which shows the mounting surface of a cover member. It is a front view of a cover member. It is a left view of a cover member. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59; FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59; Fig. 63(a) is a front view and Fig. 63(b) is a back view showing the cutting area of the first cutting portion of the cover member. Fig. 64(a) is a front view and Fig. 64(b) is a rear view showing the cut area of the second cut portion (and the first cut portion) of the cover member. Fig. 65(a) shows a step of attaching a fastening screw, and Fig. 65(b) shows a state before attaching the cover member. 66(c) shows a state in which the cover member is being attached to the box upper member, and FIG. 66(d) shows a state in which the cover member is attached to the box upper member. Fig. 67(a) shows a step of cutting a cut portion, and Fig. 67(b) shows a step of removing a fastening screw. Fig. 68(c) shows a state in which the cover member is being removed from the box upper member, and Fig. 68(d) shows a state where the cover member has been removed from the box upper member. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a first modified example of the cover member; 70(a) is a front view, and FIG. 70(b) is a back view of a second modification of the cover member. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a game board, etc. of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment; It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning opening unit. 73A(a) is an initial state, and FIG. 73A(b) is a state where a prize can be won to the V switch or the remaining ball switch. FIG. . FIG. 73B(a) is a plan view of the movable part drive mechanism of the big winning hole unit, FIG. 73B(a) shows the remaining ball switch winable state (initial state), and FIG. 73B(b) shows the V switch winable state. It is a front view of the big winning opening unit, showing a V-switch winning prohibited state. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 74; It is a front view of the big winning opening unit, showing a V-switch winning possible state. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 76; It is a front view (specific game state) of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a transition state when the game machine according to the fifth embodiment is powered on; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of game control. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (first half). It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (second half). It is a flowchart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a table which illustrates big hit probability, small hit probability, and fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 information setting process. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare/interval processing (first half); FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare/interval processing (second half); FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing.

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
1, 2, and 3 are diagrams for explaining the gaming machine. 1, 2 and 3 are a perspective view, a front view and a left side view of the gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility via hinges 16a and 16b so as to be freely opened and closed. The opening/closing frame consists of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15.
(front frame unit). Note that the frame 11 and the front frame 12 constitute an outer frame unit 17 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 35) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 is
It functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 35) formed on the game board 30 visible. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14 . The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by rotating and opening only the glass frame 15 via the hinges 12a and 12b (FIG. 4). Further, by rotating and opening the front frame 12 via the hinges 16a and 16b in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device 100 (main board) arranged on the back side of the game board 30 can be opened. ) (see FIG. 79). The glass frame 15 and/or the front frame 12 are locked or opened by the key portion 446 .

A front frame inner member 482 having an overall concave shape when viewed from the front is arranged in front of the edge of the cover glass 14 in the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7) of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit). there is The front frame inner member 482 includes a bottom plate 482a extending in the left-right direction and a bottom plate 482a extending in the left-right direction.
two right and left vertical plates 482b, 482c extending vertically from both ends of a, respectively. The vertical plates 482b and 482c face the front (player side) on the lower side, but are twisted in the central portion, and face the central side of the gaming machine 10 on the upper side (see FIG. 33(a)). reference).

The front frame inner member 482 has black as a color with low brightness and saturation. For this reason, when the player looks at the display device 41 (described later) or various prize winning openings (described later) of the game board 30 through the cover glass 14 (transparent member), there are some black portions in the visual field. , the sense of pressure on the player is reduced. In addition, if the front frame inner member 482 is a color with high saturation and lightness such as red,
Because it stands out, it gives a verbose impression to the player. In addition, around the outside of the front frame inner member 482, there are light emitting devices such as the decoration devices 18b and 18c and the effect button 25, but these light emitting devices are clearly different from the black front frame inner member 482 in terms of appearance. Since it is partitioned, its light emission is conspicuous. The material of the front frame inner member 482 itself may be black, or the front surface thereof may be painted black.

In addition, various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged in the upper center, right side, and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, 18c are
It is a production device that accommodates lighting members such as LEDs inside and performs light emission production according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 80).

The decoration device 18a is a top unit extending in the horizontal direction of the game machine 10 above the glass frame 15 and protruding forward. In the present embodiment, the decoration device 18a is fixed and does not operate, but in order to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player, the decoration device 18a projects forward from the retracted initial position (normal position) only when necessary, or moves vertically. It may move.

The decoration device 18b is a protruding effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. The decoration device 18c is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration devices 18b and 18c irradiate the player with light toward the central side (inside) of the gaming machine 10, and open the plurality of openings 795a of the side cover 795.
light leaks to the outside of the game machine 10 through the inner lens 794 (inner cover).
The detailed configuration of the decoration devices 18b and 18c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

Upper speakers 19a and 19b are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19c and 19d are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a and 19b. The lower speakers 19c and 19d are connected to the glass frame 15
and the lower right corner of the front frame 12 . These upper speakers 19a,
The 19b and the lower speakers 19c and 19d emit sound effects, warning sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are covered with a right speaker decoration member 470a and a left speaker decoration member 470b, respectively. will be described later based on

An upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the top. Like the front frame inner member 482, the top plate 21 also has black as a color with low brightness and saturation. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launching device 530 (described later). A detailed configuration of the upper tray unit 20 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 27. FIG.

The upper tray unit 20 includes a performance operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 2 that performs light-emitting performance etc. according to the game state.
2 and .

The effect operation device is an operation device including the effect button 25, volume control buttons 690d and 690e, and a cross key 690f. ing. The effect button 25 is arranged in the opening of the operation panel 690 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 690 . The operation panel 690 can reflect light by plating the surface with metal or by making the entire panel made of metal, and has, for example, metallic luster of silver. When the production button 25 emits light, the light from the production button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 690, and the lighting production of the production button 25 becomes effective.

As will be described later, the effect button 25 has a transparent button lens 754 on the top surface, and the character "PUSH" of the button lens decoration 756 arranged below the button lens 754 can be seen (FIG. 18). Also, the effect button 25 has a vibration function such that it is vibrated by a motor 771 as driving means (FIG. 18). In addition, the effect button 25 may operate so as to pop out upward.
0 black front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a), the player notices that there is a change in the part that looks black, and does not miss the change (operation) of the performance button 25.例文帳に追加If the effect button 25 has a color (for example, silver) different from that of the front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a) or emits light when popping out, the change (movement) of the effect button 25 is not overlooked.

Volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjust the volume of the speaker by increasing or decreasing (+-). The cross key 690f is provided adjacent to the volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjusts the brightness of the LED, for example.

The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 690 of the upper tray unit 20 . The ball lending operation device includes a balance display section 690a, a ball lending button 690b, and a return button 690c. The balance display portion 690a is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like. Ball rental button 690
b is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 690c is used by the player when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button to operate.

The decoration device 22 is provided in the upper tray unit 20 and is a device that accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside and performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 80).

Below the glass frame 15 including the upper tray unit 20 and the like and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher 530 and a lower tray capable of storing game balls. 23 and the like are provided. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are matched in shape and arranged side by side in the vertical direction. By operating the upper tray operation part 735 of the upper tray unit 20, the game ball on the upper tray 21 can be made to flow down to the lower tray 23. - 特許庁A detailed configuration of the lower tray unit 29 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG.

The operation handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19c. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device 5
30 shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 530 is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device 530 can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball to the game area 32 in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can perform various shooting modes with different shooting force. You can shoot a game ball with . The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is arranged below the upper tray unit 20 with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit 20 . The lower tray 23 has an opening 455a (described later) vertically penetrating the bottom surface of the lower tray 23, and an opening/closing operation section 467 for opening and closing the opening 455a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 467 to open the opening 455a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the opening 455a.

In addition, on the back side of the front frame 12, there are a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and a tank from the upper tank 448. A payout unit 780 or the like for paying out the game balls that have flowed down to the upper tray 21 is arranged (FIG. 3).

As shown in FIG. 3, in this embodiment, the decoration device 18a (top unit) protrudes forward a little larger than the upper tray unit 20, and the decoration devices 18b and 18c (protruding effect units) and the lower tray unit protrude conspicuously. It protrudes forward considerably more than 29 (see dash-dotted line).
. That is, the amount of forward projection of the decoration device 18a is slightly larger than that of the upper tray unit 20 and considerably larger than that of the decoration devices 18b and 18c and the lower tray unit 29. Here, the amount of protrusion is the distance from the rear portion of the glass frame 15 (for example, the cover glass 14) to the tip 432a (apex) in the front-rear direction. However, the forward projection amount of the decoration device 18a is not limited to that shown in FIG. 3, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in order to prevent the player's head from colliding with the decoration device 18a (top unit), the projection amount of the decoration device 18a is made smaller than that of the upper tray unit 20 (decoration device 18b).
, 18c), and the leading edge 432a (apex) of the decoration device 18a may be arranged behind the leading edge 20a (apex) of the upper tray unit 20. FIG.

FIG. 4 is an exploded view of the gaming machine. A part of the game board 30 is omitted for clarity.

The decoration device 18a (top unit) includes a main body portion 432, a transparent cover 434 positioned in front of the main body portion 432, a decorative portion 436 projecting left and right from the front portion of the main body portion 432, and a decorative portion 436.
left and right light-emitting portions 440 (light-emitting means) located behind the body portion 432, and mounting portions 438 and 442 located behind the body portion 432. As shown in FIG. The decoration device 18a has a shape that widens upward, downward, leftward, and rightward toward the front in order to make it appear larger and wider to the player. The decoration device 18 a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 by an attachment portion 442 connected to a receiving portion 444 of the front frame base unit 480 or the like.

Between the front surface 432b of the body portion 432 and the transparent cover 434, a sheet on which the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed is arranged. By replacing only the sheet, the decorating device 18a can be used for a different model without replacing the entire decorating device 18a, and the cost can be reduced.

A ball shooting device 530 for shooting game balls and a foul ball catching unit 560 (foul ball catching member) for catching foul balls (described later) are arranged below the front frame 12 . Details of the ball launcher 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. The foul ball catching unit 560 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14 to 17. FIG.

A plurality of game board locking members 12c for locking the locked portion 30d of the game board 30 (see FIG. 35) are provided at the left end of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. The game board 30 is attached to the front frame 4 via the locked portion 30d and the game board locking member 12c. A receiving portion 451 that connects with an engaging portion 452 of the lower tray unit 29 is provided at the right end portion of the front frame 12 .

A prize ball payout port 443 is provided on the lower left side of the front frame 12 to allow the prize balls paid out from the payout unit 780 to pass through the prize ball inlet 484 of the upper tray 21 .

[Lower plate unit]
A detailed configuration of the lower tray unit 29 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5 shows a perspective view (a) of the lower tray unit 29 as viewed obliquely from the upper right side and a perspective view (b) of the lower tray unit 29 as viewed from the oblique upper left side. 6 shows a top view (a), a cross-sectional view (b), and enlarged cross-sectional views (c) and (d) of the lower tray unit 29. As shown in FIG.

The lower tray unit 29 includes a lower tray base 453 on the back side, and a left case portion 456, a central case portion 458, and a right case portion 460 connected to the lower tray base 453 from the front.
The lower tray unit 29 also includes a lower case section 459 that is below the left case section 456 and connected to the lower tray base 453 from the front.

The lower tray unit 29 also has a call button 454 in front of the left case portion 456 for calling the staff of the game hall (game shop). The ON signal of the call button 454 is input to the game control device 100 (FIG. 79), sent as external information from the external information terminal 71 to the data lamp, and the data lamp, which is a display device for game information and the like, emits light.

A right decorative portion 466 for decorating the right front side of the lower tray unit 29 is provided in front of the central case portion 458 .
a is provided. In front of the lower plate 23, a left decoration portion 4 for decorating the left front side of the lower plate unit 29 is provided.
66a is provided.

The central case portion 458 has a vertical portion 458a extending substantially vertically and a horizontal portion 458b extending substantially horizontally. Between the vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458 and the right case portion 460, the lower speaker 19c and the shaft portion 24a of the operating handle 24 are arranged.

The lower tray unit 29 is roughly divided into a flat portion 29a extending in the left-right direction and a flat portion 29a.
It consists of a right protrusion 29b that protrudes upward on the right side of a. Flat portion 29 a includes lower plate 23 , left case portion 456 , and lateral portion 458 b of central case portion 458 . Above the flat portion 29a, a bottom plate portion 701 (described later) of the upper tray unit 20 is arranged to face. right protrusion 2
9b is the vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458, the right case portion 460, and the lower speaker 19c.
, and an operating handle 24 . so that the glass frame 15 can be closed against the front frame 12,
The right projecting portion 29b is connected to the right end portion of the upper tray unit 20 and the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7).
) is fitted from behind in the lower right corner.

A game ball passage 462 (groove) is formed between the left case portion 456 and the central case portion 458 . A cover 46, which is a transparent member covering the passage 462 from above, is provided at the upper end of the passage 462.
4 is provided. Since the cover 464 is transparent, the inside of the passage 462 can be visually recognized when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12 .

A first inlet 461 and a second inlet 465 for game balls are provided on the rear surface of the lower tray base 453 of the lower tray unit 29 . A foul ball (falling ball) that has been shot from the ball launching device 530 but returned without reaching the play area 32 flows into the first entrance 461 from the foul ball catch unit 560, and the upper tray 21 Payout unit 7 when full (full)
Gaming balls (prize balls) from 80 may flow in. A game ball ejected from the upper tray 21 by operating the upper tray operating section 735 may flow into the second inlet 465 . The game balls pass through the passage 462 from the first entrance 461 and the second entrance 465 and flow into the lower tray 23 from the exit 463 of the passage 462 . In addition, when the bottom plate 23 is full, game balls are stored in the passage 462 . aisle 46
2 is partly connected to the left case part 456 in order to communicate with the first inlet 461 and the second inlet 465
and may pass through or under the central case portion 458 .

Since the foul ball passes through the passage 462 from the first entrance 461, one end of the string is attached to the foul ball (the other end of the string is attached to the game ball in the game area 32) as part of the fraudulent act. is used, the transparent cover 464 of the passageway 462 is scratched by thread and becomes white and non-transparent, so that fraud can be easily detected. Also, the transparent cover 464 can be replaced even if it is damaged by fraud, and the entire lower tray unit 29 need not be replaced.

A plate portion 455 forming the bottom and front portions of the lower plate 23 is arranged in front of the left case portion 456 and above the lower case portion 459 . As shown in FIG. 6B, the plate portion 455 has an L-shaped cross section in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. The left case portion 456 has an integrally formed upper plate 456a and a front plate 456b. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the front plate 456b of the left case portion 456 (the back plate of the lower tray 23) is slanted so that it is positioned deeper as it goes downward, so that the player can move diagonally upward. Lower plate 2 from the front
It becomes easy to rake out the game ball of 3 by hand.

The bottom of the lower plate 23 (that is, the bottom of the plate portion 455) has an annular opening 455a and the opening 4
Valleys 455b extending radially in four directions from 55a are provided. A game ball that has flowed into the lower tray 23 from the exit 463 of the passage 462 falls into the opening 455a through the valley 455b that is easy to pass through. The opening 455a is normally closed by the opening/closing member 457, but the opening/closing operation portion 46
7 opens the opening/closing member 457 . When the opening/closing member 457 is opened, the game ball is placed in the opening 4
55 a and is discharged to the outside of the game machine 10 from an annular discharge port 459 a projecting from the lower case portion 459 .

As shown in FIG. 6(c), the depth D1 of the recess (recess) of the lower plate 23 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the game ball with the hand. Note that the depth D1 is the lower end of the opening 455a (
It corresponds to the height from the upper surface of the closed opening/closing member 457 to the lower end of the outlet 463 of the passage 462 . Also, the depth D2 of the annular discharge port 459a is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the opening 455a tends to fall straight down.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6(d), the depth D3 of the discharge portion (discharge hole) consisting of the discharge port 459a and the opening 455a is longer than the diameter of the game ball, but is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. short. Therefore, when the lower half side of the game ball is caught in the opening/closing member 457 (door) of the ejection portion (when it is caught and returns to the lower side), it is easy to return it to the lower side, and the upper half side of the game ball is the opening/closing member 457 of the ejection portion. When the game ball is caught in the box (when it is caught and discharged out of the game machine), the game ball is guided straight to the box (recovery box for automatic counting or so-called dollar box), so it does not fall out of the box. It should be noted that the depth D3 is
It corresponds to the height from the lower end of 9a to the upper end of opening 455a.

[Sound output part]
The configuration of the sound output unit 473 for outputting sound will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. FIG. The sound output unit 473 includes the upper speakers 19a and 19b and the upper speakers 19a and 19b as sound generating means.
Speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are provided as peripheral members of b. FIG. 7 is an exploded view of the glass frame 15 excluding the decoration device 18a (top unit). FIG. 8 shows the decoration device 1
Front view (a) and cross-sectional view (b) of glass frame 15 excluding 8a, and speaker decoration member 47
It is a front view (c) and a rear view (d) excluding 0a and 470b. FIG. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view (a) of the sound output section, and a view (b) showing how the sounds output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b are transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the front frame base unit 480 of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) is
Upper speakers 19a and 19b are provided. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are inclined so that the sound is output toward the lower side and inner side (center side) of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加front frame base unit 48
0, the upper plate unit 20 and the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are attached. The right speaker decoration member 470a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover the right upper speaker 19a. The left speaker decoration member 470b is attached to the left upper speaker 1
It is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover 9b.

The speaker decoration members 470a, 470b prevent the sound from the upper speakers 19a, 19b from being directly transmitted to the player. The sounds emitted from the front portions of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are respectively reflected by the rear surfaces of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b, hit the cover glass 14, are reflected there again, and are transmitted to the player (the solid line in FIG. 9B). ). Note that the lower speakers 19c, 19
Sound from d is transmitted directly to the player. The speaker decoration members 470a and 470b constitute the first sound reflecting means, and the cover glass 14 constitutes the second sound reflecting means.

The upper speaker 19a (or the upper speaker 19b) includes the speaker body 490, the speaker body 4
A first speaker housing member 491a behind the speaker 90 and a first speaker housing member 491a located around the speaker main body 490
The speaker unit includes a second speaker housing member 491b connected to the speaker housing member 491a and a speaker outer frame member 491c arranged around the second speaker housing member 491b.

The first speaker housing member 491a and the second speaker housing member 491b are combined to
The speaker main body 490 is enclosed and housed except for the front part of the speaker main body 490.例文帳に追加A space 492 (gap) is formed between the rear portion of the speaker body 490 and the first speaker housing member 491a. A box-shaped space 493 (gap) is formed between the cover glass 14 and the lower portion of the first speaker housing member 491a forming the rear surface of the upper speakers 19a and 19b (speaker units). The length L1 of the space 493 in the front-rear direction, that is, the distance between the lower part of the first speaker housing member 491a and the cover glass 14 is determined so that the sound emitted from the rear of the upper speakers 19a and 19b (rear surface of the speaker unit) is played with the cover glass 14. so that it can be reflected toward the person (Fig. 9(b)
dotted line), set to an appropriate value.

As shown by the solid and dotted lines in FIG. 9B, the sounds emitted from the front and rear portions of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected by the cover glass 14 and directed toward the player, producing various effects. for example,
If the sound is high-pitched, the sound directly hitting the player hurts the player's ears, but the cover glass 14 (wall) can alleviate the pain. In addition, when the sound (particularly low-pitched sound) collides with the cover glass 14, the sound seems to come from the entire cover glass 14, which is preferable. Also, the sound is less likely to leak outside, making it easier for the player to hear the sound.

As shown in FIG. 8(d), the front frame base unit 480 has the upper speaker 1 on its rear surface.
A right rear cover member 488a and a left rear cover member 488b are provided at positions corresponding to the rear (back side) of each of 9a and 19b. The back cover members 488a, 488b have a box-like shape. The right rear cover member 488a can confine and attenuate the sound (vibration) transmitted from the upper speaker 19a to the rear (back side) through the front frame base unit 480 in an internal space. Similarly, the left rear cover member 488b is the upper speaker 1
The sound (vibration) transmitted from 9b to the rear (rear side) via the front frame base unit 480 can be confined in the internal space and attenuated. Therefore, the back cover members 488a, 488b
has the effect of preventing noise and can protect various electronic circuit boards around the upper speakers 19a and 19b from vibration.

In addition, the back side cover members 488a and 488b can keep the electric wiring away from the cover glass 14 by arranging the electric wiring on the outer side (the side opposite to the cover glass 14).
The cover glass 14 (including the frame 14a) is attached to the mounting portion 480a of the front frame base unit 480.
make it easier to remove from In at least one of the back side cover members 488a and 488b, the portion along the cover glass 14 conforms to the shape of the member (for example, the guide rail 31) of the game board 30, and the glass frame 15 is attached to the front frame 12. Acts as a guide when closing. Further, the back side cover members 488a and 488b may be thickened in the front-rear direction and function as spacers to prevent the game board 30 from coming into contact with the cover glass 14. FIG. in this case,
The game board 30 may have portions that contact the back side cover members 488a and 488b.

The front frame base unit 480 will be further described below. The front frame base unit 480 includes the frame 14a of the cover glass 14, the front frame inner member 482 arranged in front of the frame 14a, Prepare. In addition, the front frame base unit 480 includes a prize ball inlet 484 through which prize balls paid out from the payout unit 780 flow into the upper tray 21, and a shot ball supply path 486 that supplies game balls from the upper tray 21 to the ball shooting device 530. And prepare. The front frame base unit 480 also includes:
A curved recessed end portion 480c that conforms to the right projecting portion 29b of the lower tray unit 29 is provided on the lower right side.

The prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7) has a prize ball passage 487 (
FIG. 8(d)) are in communication. The prize ball passage 487 is the prize ball outlet 443 of the front frame 12 (Fig. 4).
Connect with Therefore, the prize balls from the payout unit 780 are placed in the prize ball payout port 443 (Fig. 4),
It flows into the upper tray 21 through the prize ball passage 487 (FIG. 8(d)) and the prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7).

In the normal case where the upper tray operating portion 735 is not operated, the opening/closing member 734 (FIGS. 18 and 19) is in the closed state, and game balls are supplied from the upper tray 21 to the shot ball supply path 486. On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 734 is opened by operating the upper tray operation portion 735, the game ball flows not into the shot ball supply path 486 but into the downward passage 485, and the second inlet 465 communicates with the passage 485. reach. As a result, the game ball is discharged from the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23.例文帳に追加

Further, the front frame base unit 480 has a ball stopper unit 489 as shown in FIG. 8(d). The ball stopping unit 489 is for stopping the game ball from flowing down behind the front frame base unit 480 from the shot ball supply path 486 when the glass frame 15 is released from the front frame 12 . In the ball stopper unit 489 , a substantially L-shaped ball stopper member 483 capable of opening and closing the shot ball supply path 486 is rotatably pivoted to the front frame base unit 480 . Note that the ball stopper unit 489 may be the same as the conventional one (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-232200).

The ball stopper member 483 is biased by a biasing member (not shown) such as a coil spring so that the shot ball supply path 486 is closed. When the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the ball stop member 483 engages with the ball stop member converting portion 536 (see FIGS. 4 and 13) projecting from the front surface of the ball launching device 530. By doing so, the ball supply path 486 is opened. The front end face of the ball stop member converting portion 536 is inclined to form a trapezoidal cam surface for sliding the ball stop member 483 in contact therewith.

[Speaker decoration]
10, 11A, and 11B, speaker decoration members 470a, 470b
will be described. 10, 11A, and 11B show only the speaker decoration member 470a, the speaker decoration member 470a and the speaker decoration member 47 are shown.
0b has the same configuration if left and right are interchanged.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 seen obliquely from the right. 11A is a side view (a) of the speaker decoration member 470a attached to the gaming machine 10, and a speaker decoration member 47. FIG.
It is the perspective view (b) which looked at 0a from the diagonal upper left. FIG. 11B is a front view (a) of the speaker decoration member 470a and a perspective view (b) of the speaker decoration member 470a as seen obliquely from the right.

The speaker decoration member 470a (470b) has outer mounting portions 514a and 514b that are screwed to the sides of the front frame base unit 480, and inner mounting portions that are screwed to the front frame base unit 480 on the inner mounting plate 512. 516. Further, the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) has an opening 518 through which the mounting portion 438 of the decoration device 18a (top unit) passes.

The speaker decoration member 470a (470b) serves as a light diffusing means for diffusing light.
2, and includes an upper reflecting portion 504 and a lower reflecting portion 506 as light reflecting means for reflecting light. The diffusion part 502 is arranged adjacent to an inner mounting plate 512 arranged inside (center side) of the gaming machine 10 . The upper reflecting portion 504 is arranged on the lower right side of the diffusing portion 502 and in contact with the diffusing portion 502 . The top reflector 504 and the diffuser 502 may be substantially coplanar. The lower reflector 506 is arranged below the upper reflector 504 . The diffusing portion 502, the upper reflecting portion 504, and the lower reflecting portion 506 are
The surface (especially the front surface) is plated with metal, or has a surface portion (surface plate) made of metal.

The diffusion unit 502 is arranged behind the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a in a state in which the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) and the decoration device 18a (top unit) are attached to the gaming machine 10 (front frame base unit 480). be. The diffuser 502 may be placed in contact with the back (rear) of the transparent case of the light emitter 440 . The diffusing portion 502 is provided on a frosted glass-like surface portion in which irregularities of various sizes are randomly arranged, and diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting portion 440 rearward by irregularly reflecting it. As a result, even if LEDs are arranged inside the light emitting part 440 in the form of point light sources, the light emitting part 440 can be illuminated as a whole. The light diffusely reflected by the diffusing portion 502 travels forward or toward the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506 . By emitting light from the light emitting section 440 of the decoration device 18a, it is possible to appeal to the player who sees the game machine 10 from the side (in the direction of the entrance to the game island).

The upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506 can reflect the light from the light emitting portion 440 and have a blade-like shape as a whole. The upper reflector 504 has a front surface 504a and side surfaces 504b. The lower reflector 506 has a front surface 506a and side surfaces 506b. Upper reflector 504 and lower reflector 50
6 may increase in thickness toward the outside of the gaming machine 10 . As shown in FIG. 11B(a), the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 has a washboard shape, and a plurality of ridges 50 projecting forward.
4c are arranged side by side. Similarly, the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 also has a washboard shape, and a plurality of ridges 506c projecting forward are arranged side by side. individual ridges 50
4c and 506c extend substantially vertically.

The overall inclination (angle) of the front surfaces 504a and 506a with respect to the up-down direction or left-right direction can be adjusted as appropriate. For example, as shown in the side view of FIG.
04a may be arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the vertical direction and the horizontal direction and facing forward, while the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 may be greatly inclined from the vertical direction. The lower reflecting portion 506 is the light emitting portion 440
is farther from the front surface 506a than the upper reflecting portion 504, this prevents the reflected light from the front surface 506a from being too downward. The light from the light emitting unit 440 can be focused on a predetermined position (for example, the player's head). In addition, the diffuser 502 and the front surface 440a of the case of the light emitter 440 are the upper reflector 5
04 facing forward, the diffusing portion 502 and the light emitting portion 440
and the light emitting effect of the upper reflecting part 504 are coordinated, and the interest is improved.

As shown in FIG. 11B(a), the cross section (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the plurality of ridges 504c and 506c is like sawtooth. Each of the ridges 504c and 506c has a triangular (or L-shaped) cross section protruding forward, and the reflective surface 5 on which the light from the light emitting part 440 of the decoration device 18a hits.
22 and a non-reflecting surface 524 (shaded portion) on which the light from the light emitting unit 440 does not hit. Due to the presence of the reflective surface 522 and the non-reflective surface 524, only the reflective surface 522 of the front surfaces 504a and 506a shines and looks like a striped pattern from the front.

Further, by adjusting the width of the reflecting surface 522, the amount of reflected light from the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting section 504 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting section 506 can be adjusted. For example, the lower reflector 50
6 is farther from the light emitting part 440 than the upper reflecting part 504, so that the ridge 506c has a width larger than that of the ridge 504c so that the amount of reflected light is uniform between the upper reflecting part 504 and the lower reflecting part 506. It may have a reflective surface 522 .

In addition, the reflecting surface 522 is inclined downward toward the center side (inside) of the game machine 10, but the reflecting surface 52
2 from the horizontal direction, the front surface 50 of the upper reflecting section 504
4a or the amount of reflected light from the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 can be adjusted. For example, since the lower reflecting portion 506 is farther from the light emitting portion 440 than the upper reflecting portion 504, the reflection surface 522 of the projection 506c is arranged so that the amount of reflected light is uniform between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506. , the inclination (angle) from the horizontal direction may be smaller than that of the reflecting surface 522 of the projection 504c. note that,
Reducing the inclination of the reflective surface 522 of the ridge 506c (that is, reducing the forward height)
Since the area of the non-reflecting surface 524 (shadowed portion) is reduced, the amount of reflected light from the front surface 506a is increased.

10, 11A, and 11B, the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) includes a first decoration portion 508 facing the upper reflection portion 504 outside and behind the upper reflection portion 504, a second decorative portion 509 arranged between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506;
A third decorative portion 510 facing the lower reflecting portion 506 laterally rearward of the lower reflecting portion 506, and a fourth decorative portion 511 facing the third decorative portion 510 below the third decorative portion 510 (not shown in FIG. 11B). )and,
Prepare. Further, on the speaker decoration member 470a (470b), two thin blade-like lower decoration portions 520a and 520b are arranged in steps below the lower reflecting portion 506. As shown in FIG. The light emitted from the light-emitting portion 440 of the decoration device 18a is blocked by the lower reflection portion 506 and the upper reflection portion 504, and hardly reaches the decoration portions 508 to 511, 520a, and 520b.
4 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflector 506 becomes conspicuous.

The first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 have a metallic luster by plating the surface with metal or using a surface portion (surface plate) made of metal.
is made of black resin (a color with low brightness and saturation), does not reflect light, and does not have metallic luster.
Therefore, the metallic luster of the first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 becomes conspicuous, thereby improving the decorativeness.

[Ball Launcher]
Details of the ball launching device 530 (shooting unit, ball launching means) will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13 . FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 with the ball launcher 530. FIG. 13 is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of the ball launching device 530, and a perspective view (c) of the cutting blade 550. FIG.

A game ball shot by a shooting pestle 532 of the ball shooting device 530 is normally sent from a shooting rail 533 formed in the lower part of the front frame 12 so as to be inclined upward from the lower right to the upper left to a foul ball catch unit 560 (foul ball catch unit 560). It jumps over the ball catching member), flows into the shot ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30, and is led to the game area 32 (see FIG. 35) through the shot ball guide passage 33.

12, a game ball (launched ball) with a low launching force (launching speed) returns from the launching ball guide passage 33 without reaching the game area 32. It becomes a foul ball (falling ball) and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560 . In particular, the foul ball (falling ball) collides with the ball stopper projection 585 of the foul ball catching unit 560 and flows into the foul ball catching unit 560 . Also, a game ball (fired ball) with a lower firing force (fire speed) becomes a foul ball (direct ball) that directly jumps into the foul ball catch unit 560 without reaching the fired ball guide passage 33 . Thus, the foul ball catching unit 560 constitutes catching means for catching foul balls that have been launched but do not enter the play area 32 . The details of the configuration of foul ball catching unit 560 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), a ball shooting device 530 for shooting game balls is mounted on the upper tray 21.
a guiding path 542 that communicates with a shot ball supply path 486 that supplies game balls stored in the game balls;
Prepare.

A game ball (illegal ball) to which a string member such as fishing line is attached is shot by the ball shooting device 530, and when the game ball enters the game area 32 (see FIG. 35), the string member is operated from the upper tray 21. There is a case where fraudulent actions such as winning a prize in the winning opening are performed, and the cutting mechanism 544 cuts the thread member of the fraudulent ball. The disconnection mechanism 544 constitutes a first anti-fraud measure (first anti-fraud section).

In the closed state of the glass frame 15 , the guide path 542 on the front frame 12 side and the shot ball supply path 486 on the glass frame 15 side are connected and communicated to form part of the supply path 540 . The supply channel 540 is
The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are guided to the right in the left-right direction, then to the rear in the front-rear direction, and supplied to the shooting position of the ball shooting device 530 .

The ball shooting device 530 has a base plate 531 installed on the front lower right portion of the front frame 12 and a shooting punch 532 rotatably arranged on the front surface of the base plate 531 . Also, the base plate 53
1 is fixed with a firing rail 533 (firing path) that slopes upward from the right side to the left side.

The shooting pestle 532 is configured to rotate based on the rotating operation of the operating handle 24 and to shoot the game ball at the shooting position on the shooting rail 533 . The game ball shot by the shooting punch 532 is guided to the left in the horizontal direction by the shooting rail 533, flows from the shooting rail 533 into the shooting ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30, passes through the shooting ball guide passage 33, and enters the game area. lead to 32.

The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 530 is set so as to increase as the rotation amount of the operation handle 24 increases.

An entrance portion 542a of the guideway 542 is provided in a cover member 534 attached to the base plate 531 of the ball launching device 530 so as to cover the front of the base plate 531 . The inlet portion 542a is formed as an opening penetrating the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the guide path 542 is provided with a cutting mechanism 544 for cutting the thread member of the irregular ball.

The cutting mechanism 544 includes a thread guide portion 546 formed on the cover member 534 so as to be connected to the entrance portion 542a of the guide path 542, and a cutting blade attached to the cover member 534 so that the cutting edge portion is positioned within the thread guide portion 546. 550 and a fixing plate 548 that fixes the cutting blade 550 to the cover member 534 .

The thread guide portion 546 is an opening penetrating the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction, and the guide path 54
2 is cut out so as to be connected to the upper portion of the left side of the inlet portion 542a. The thread guide portion 546 and the entrance portion 542a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The thread guide portion 546 is configured as a guide passage that allows the thread member of the illegal ball to move toward the cutting edge portion (predetermined position) of the cutting blade 550 when the illegal ball is fired.

As shown in FIG. 13C, the cutting blade 550 includes a flat base end portion 553, and a flat plate-like first distal end portion connected to the base end portion 553 and extending in the same plane as the base end portion 553. 551 and the proximal end 5
53 and a flat second distal end portion 552 that is bent backward from the proximal end portion 553 . The first tip portion 551 and the second tip portion 552 are vertically arranged side by side.
A gap 554 formed between (boundary) 51 and 552 serves as a cutting portion for cutting the thread member of the irregular ball. A tip end face 551a (right side face) of the first tip end portion 551 and a tip end face 552a (right side face) of the second tip end portion 552 are arranged in the gap portion 554 so as to guide the thread member of the irregular ball to the gap portion 554.
is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward

The cutting blade 550 is fixed to the cover member 534 via the fixing plate 548 while being accommodated in the accommodation recess 534 a formed on the back surface of the cover member 534 . The cutting blade 550 is fixed within the housing recess 534 a by a fixing plate 548 that engages the cover member 534 . The fixed plate 548 is arranged on the rear side of the cutting blade 550 fitted in the housing recess 534a.

The housing recess 534a is shaped so that the cutting blade 550 is fitted therein.
is formed with a recess in the The accommodation recess 534a is a recess formed to model the outer shape of the cutting blade 550, and when the cutting blade 550 is fitted in the accommodation recess 534a, the cutting blade 5
Movement of 50 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is restricted. Also, the cutting blade 550
4a, the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 550 such as the clearance 554 is located at a recessed position (a leftward position) of the thread guiding portion 546. As shown in FIG.

In this way, the cutting blade 550 has its cutting edge portion directed to the right side and the thread guiding portion 54
6 (see FIG. 13(a)).

In the cutting mechanism 544 configured as described above, when the illegal ball attached with the string member is shot by the ball launching device 530, the string member of the illegal ball is passed through the thread guide portion 546 to the cutting blade 550. , and bite into the gap 554 of the cutting blade 550 . The thread member biting into the gap 554 is pulled and cut by the momentum of the illegal ball. The thread guide portion 546 of the cutting mechanism 544 is connected to the inlet portion 542a of the guide path 542 of the supply channel 540 so as to be connected to the inlet portion 542a.
2a is notched, and the cutting blade 550 is arranged at a recessed position of the thread guiding part 546, so that the thread member of the illegal ball can be cut without hindering the flow of the game ball. becomes.

The supply channel 540 guides the game balls stored in the upper tray 21 to the right side, then to the rear, and supplies them to the shooting position of the ball shooting device 530. The shooting rail 533 shoots from the shooting position. It is configured to guide the played game ball to the left side. The thread guide portion 546 is formed so as to be connected to the left side of the entrance portion 542a of the guide path 542, and the cutting blade 550 is arranged so that its cutting edge faces rightward. In this way, by providing the string guide portion 546 on the side of the entrance portion 542a in the game ball launching direction, and providing the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 550 in the direction opposite to the game ball launching direction, the string member of the illegal ball can be more effectively handled. It is possible to cut with certainty.

[Foul ball catch unit]
14 to 17, foul ball catching unit 5 capable of catching foul balls.
60 will be described in detail. A foul ball is a game ball that is launched by ball launcher 530 but does not enter play area 32 . 14A is a front view (a) and an exploded view (b) of the foul ball catching unit 560. FIG. 14B is a rear view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the foul ball catching unit 560. FIG. FIG. 15 shows the foul ball catching unit 56.
0 (a) and a horizontal cross-sectional view (b) of the part member 560b. The upper diagram of FIG. 15(a) is the same as FIG. 14B(a). FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the foul ball catching unit 560 viewed obliquely from above. FIG. 17 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 with the foul ball catching unit 560 removed.

The foul ball catching unit 560 is a combination of a base member 560a and a part member 560b connected to the rear side of the base member 560a from behind. base member 5
By being installed on the front frame 12, 60a forms various game ball flow paths 590 (590a-590d) in contact with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12. FIG. Further, an inter-base part flow path 591 is formed between the base member 560a and the part member 560b. note that,
The foul ball catching unit 560 includes a substantially triangular body portion 569 when viewed from the front, and a dropped ball recovery portion 570 located on the left side of the body portion 569 . Falling payout ball recovery unit 57
0 collects game balls that flow out from the prize ball payout port 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and fall downward when the glass frame 15 is in an open state.

First, the base member 560a will be described. The base member 560a includes a flat plate-like front portion 561 (front plate) and a flat plate-like rolling portion 56 provided vertically at the rear of the upper portion of the front portion 561.
4 (rolling plate) and a base-side box portion 56 provided rearward in the lower central portion of the front portion 561
5 and . The front portion 561 is provided with three windows 561a for visually recognizing the rear. The window portion 561a also functions to prevent static electricity from staying. Base side box portion 56
5 has an opening in the front part 561 at the front. An upper end surface 594 of the base-side box portion 565 is an inclined surface on which a game ball can roll leftward.

In addition, the base member 560a is located on the right side of the opening of the base-side box portion 565, and the front portion 56
1, a base side reinforcing rib 566 which is an annular enclosure provided vertically in the front at the lower right part of 1, and a parts supporting portion 567 and a right flow path arranged at a position opposite to the base side reinforcing rib 566 with respect to the front part 561 and a forming portion 568 . The parts support portion 567 and the right flow path forming portion 568 are vertically provided rearward in the lower right portion of the front portion 561 .

The part support portion 567 has an "F" shape rotated 90 degrees when viewed from the rear (FIG. 14B(a)), and a long plate portion 567a and a short plate support the part member 560b from below. Part 56
7b. Both the long plate portion 567a and the short plate portion 567b have the same width in the front-rear direction and extend from the front surface portion 561, but the length (height) in the vertical direction is greater than that of the long plate portion 567a. is longer than the short plate portion 567b. The long plate portion 567a is arranged in parallel with the short plate portion 567b, and is arranged to the right of the short plate portion 567b.

The front portion 561 has an upper edge 562 extending rearward perpendicular to the front portion 561 .
The flat rolling portion 564 is inclined downward to the right in the longitudinal direction so that the game ball can roll to the lower right. The rolling portion 564 extends substantially parallel to the upper edge portion 562 , but the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). Therefore, the rolling part 564
A foul ball can flow into the

The base-side reinforcing rib 566 is attached to the part support portion 567 and the right flow path forming portion 568, and the front portion 5
61, the channel wall of the right channel 590c formed between the part support portion 567 and the right channel forming portion 568 is reinforced. Also, the base-side reinforcing ribs 566 prevent sink marks (defects such as depressions caused by molding shrinkage) during molding.

Further, the base member 560a includes a left bottom surface portion 571a located on the left side and a left bottom surface portion 571a.
A stepped bottom surface portion 571 having a right bottom surface portion 571b located lower on the right side than 71a is provided. The bottom portion 571 extends vertically from the lower end portion of the front portion 561 . In addition, a guide flow path 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a and a guide flow path 590a (left bottom surface portion 571a)
A saucer portion 572 extending from the front surface portion 561 to the front of 71 a) constitutes a dropped payout ball recovery portion 570 . The receptacle portion 572 has an L-shaped cross section in the front-rear direction, and the prize ball payout port 443 (Fig. 4,
12) are received and flowed down to the rear guide channel 590a. The bottom portion of the receiving tray portion 572 may be inclined downward to the rear so as to cause the game ball to flow down to the guide channel 590a.

The base member 560a also has a central channel forming portion 589 extending vertically rearward from the front surface portion 561 . The central flow passage forming portion 589 forms a central flow passage 590b together with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 and the front portion 561. As shown in FIG. In addition, the central flow path forming portion 589 functions as a partition plate that separates the guide flow path 590a and the central flow path 590b.

In addition, the base member 560a is provided on the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12.
Two engaging hooks 575 attached by pushing into two engaged portions 598a, 598b
a, 575b.

Next, the part member 560b will be described. The part member 560b is the base member 56
A flat plate-shaped part body portion 576 arranged parallel to the flat plate-shaped front face portion 561 of 0a, and an attachment portion 578 arranged above the part body portion 576 and attached to the front face portion 561 are provided. The part main body portion 576 has an upper end 576a that abuts on the stepped portion 564a at the rear end of the rolling portion 564 (rolling plate). The mounting portion 578 is formed in a convex shape in front of the part main body portion 576, and is mounted to the cylindrical screw receiving portion 561b (FIG. 14B(b)) of the front surface portion 561 by screwing from the rear. The mounting portion 578 has a through hole 578a through which a screw passes.

Further, the part member 560b has a part-side box portion 579 provided at the front in the lower portion of the part main body portion 576. As shown in FIG. The upper end surface 580 of the part-side box portion 579 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll leftward. The side end surface 581 of the part-side box portion 579 is
It faces and contacts the side end surface (not shown) of the base-side box portion 565 on the right side. The side end surface 581 of the part-side box portion 579 is inclined on the left side so as to be located rearward toward the left side, but the side end surface of the base-side box portion 565 is not inclined. Therefore, a narrow slit-like gap 592 exists on the left side between the base-side box portion 565 and the parts-side box portion 579 (FIG. 15(a)). It should be noted that the upper end surface 58 of the parts-side box portion 579 .
The width of 0 in the front-rear direction is slightly narrower (shorter) toward the tip 580a (left end) of the upper end surface 580.
However, the width of the upper end surface 594 of the base-side box portion 565 is constant.

The side end face 581 of the part-side box portion 579 has an opening 581a for screwing the part-side box portion 579 to the base-side box portion 565, and an angular shape (
A sharp portion 581b with a ridge and an elongated projecting engagement portion 584 that engages with the side end face of the base-side box portion 565 are provided. The engaging portion 584 may have a function of positioning the part member 560b. The base of the sharp portion 581b is supported from below by the short plate portion 567b of the parts support portion 567, and the tip of the sharp portion 581b contacts the long plate portion 567a of the parts support portion 567 (FIG. 14B(a)).

Further, the part member 560b includes a projecting portion 585 provided in front at the right end portion of the flat plate-shaped part body portion 576, and a reinforcing rib 586 provided below the projecting portion 585 to support and reinforce the projecting portion 585. Prepare.

The reinforcing rib 586 is a right plate-like member 586 that supports the lower right portion and the lower left portion of the protrusion 585 respectively.
a and a left plate member 586b. The width of the projecting portion 585 in the front-rear direction is equal to the reinforcing rib 586 (
It is shorter than the width of the two plate-like members 586a, 586b) in the front-rear direction. The front side of the upper ends of the two plate-like members 586a and 586b, which is not connected to the protrusion 585, is the base member 56.
It abuts on the upper edge 562 of 0a. Both of the two plate-like members 586a and 586b have the same width in the front-rear direction and abut on the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a (FIG. 15(a)).
. The right plate-like member 586a and the left plate-like member 586b are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction, but the length (height) of the right plate-like member 586a in the vertical direction is shorter than that of the left plate-like member 586b.
is long. The long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567 is arranged in parallel with the right side plate-like member 586a in contact with the right side plate-like member 586a (FIG. 15(a)), Support the bottom from below.

The projecting portion 585 (ball stopper) is attached to the upper edge portion 56 of the base member 560a (front portion 561).
2 (FIGS. 14A(a) and 14B(a)). As described above with reference to FIG. 12, a foul ball (falling ball) returning from the upper left shot ball guide passage 33 of the foul ball catching unit 560 collides with the protrusion 585 and travels over the protrusion 585 to the right. The ball is difficult to catch and flows into the foul ball catching unit 560 . It should be noted that the foul ball returning from the shot ball guide passage 33 is blocked by the left plate-like member 58 of the reinforcing rib 586 as a barrier.
6b and flow into the foul ball catching unit 560.

In addition, the projecting portion 585 has a hollow mountain shape (
It has a substantially "C" shape that does not close at the bottom left when viewed from the front), and because it is hollow, it is possible to reduce the collision noise between the foul ball and the protrusion 585, and to adjust the height of the collision noise as appropriate. In addition, the space defined by the two plate members 586a and 586b of the reinforcing rib 586 and the protrusion 585 is
The collision sound between the foul ball and the protrusion 585 can be confined and attenuated.

[Game ball flow and flow path (inside foul ball catch unit)]
Next, referring to FIGS. 14 to 17 (particularly, FIG. 14B(a)), the flow and flow paths of game balls (foul balls) in the foul ball catching unit 560 will be described.

A foul ball can flow into the rolling portion 564 and roll. The foul ball here is a foul ball (falling ball) that has returned from the launch ball guide passage 33, collided with the protrusion 585, and bounced back.
, a foul ball (falling ball) that returned from the shot ball guide passage 33 but did not reach the protrusion 585, or a foul ball that was slow to launch and could not pass the foul ball catch unit 560 (launch ball, direct ball) ). The game ball that rolls down the rolling part 564
4 and the projection 585 into the large opening 595a. A foul ball that collides with the protrusion 585 and bounces back, or a foul ball with a slow launch speed (launch ball, direct ball) may flow directly into the large opening 595a.

A game ball (foul ball) that has passed through the large opening 595a flows into the inter-base part flow path 591 located above the upper end surface 580 of the part-side box portion 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base-side box portion 565. The inter-base part flow path 591 is formed by the upper end surfaces 580 and 594, the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a, and the part body portion 576 of the part member 560b. The inter-base parts flow path 591 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball can roll leftward.

The width of the upper end surface 594 in the front-rear direction, that is, the amount of rearward protrusion of the base-side box portion 565 is
Since it is longer than the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can drop onto the upper end surface 594 of the base-side box portion 565 . Also, the width of the inter-base part flow path 591 (here, the upper end face 5
80 and the sum of the widths of the upper end surface 594 in the longitudinal direction) is substantially equal to the width of the rolling portion 564 in the longitudinal direction (short direction). Note that the part-side box portion 579 and the base-side box portion 565
(that is, one of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594) may be omitted. direction)
may be approximately equal to the width of In addition, the total width of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594 in the front-rear direction is
If the amount is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (the amount at which the game ball does not fall), it can be shorter than the width of the rolling part 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction).

The game ball that has passed through the inter-base parts channel 591 flows into the central channel 590b on the right side of the central channel forming portion 589. As shown in FIG. The central flow path 590b is formed between the installation surface 598 of the front frame 12 and the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a, between the base side box portion 565 and the parts side box portion 579.
and a central flow passage forming portion 589 . The central flow path 590b extends substantially vertically.

The game ball that has passed through the central flow path 590b passes through the bottom flow path 5 formed on the right bottom surface portion 571b.
Flow into 90d. In addition, as described above, the game balls falling from the prize ball payout port 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and entering the tray portion 572 also pass through the guide flow path 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a, After that, it flows into the bottom channel 590d which is located lower than the guide channel 590a.

The game ball that has passed through the bottom channel 590d passes through the discharge port 593, flows into the first inlet 461 (FIG. 6A) of the lower tray unit 29, and flows into the lower tray 23 from the first inlet 461.

In addition, a foul ball (launched ball, direct ball) from the right side with a very slow firing speed, or a foul ball (falling ball) that rarely crosses the protrusion 585 from the left side, forms a flow path on the right side with the part support portion 567. Small openings 595b between portions 568 are available for flow. The small opening 595b is
smaller than 95a.

The game ball that has passed through the small opening 595b flows into the right channel 590c formed between the right channel forming portion 568 and the long plate portion 567a of the parts support portion 567. FIG. The game ball that has passed through the right flow path 590c passes through the discharge port 593 and enters the first inlet 461 of the lower tray unit 29 (FIG. 6(a)).
)) and flows into the lower tray 23 from the first inlet 461 . In addition, the small opening 595b and the right channel 590c can be omitted, and the configuration can also be such that they do not exist.

From the three windows 561a of the base member 560a described above, the guide flow path 5
90a, the inter-base part channel 591, and the bottom channel 590d are visible, and the guide channel 59
0a, the channel 591 between the base parts, the window portion 5 when the game ball is clogged in the bottom channel 590d
A thin stick or the like can be inserted from 61a to clear the clogging of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rolling portion 564, the parts support portion 567, the right flow path forming portion 56
8. The widths of the central flow path forming portion 589 and the reinforcing ribs 586 (two plate-like members 586a and 586b) in the front-rear direction are substantially the same, but can be changed as appropriate within a range less than the diameter of the game ball. be.

[Countermeasures against fraud]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 (in particular, FIGS. 15 and 16), fraud countermeasures (goto countermeasures) in foul ball catching unit 560 will be described.

As described above, in the ball launching device 530 (launching unit), the first fraud countermeasure means (first
Although the cutting mechanism 544 that cuts the thread member of the illegal ball is provided as a fraud countermeasure unit, the foul ball catch unit 560 is provided with second to fourth fraud countermeasure means (anti-fraud countermeasure units).

In addition, in the foul ball catching unit 560, fraud countermeasures are taken against fraudulent acts (cheating) executed in the following procedure. First, a string member (fishing line, etc.) is attached to two game balls so that they form a pair, and one game ball of the pair is shot at a slow speed by the ball launching device 530 and sent to the foul ball catch unit 560 as a foul ball. drop. Subsequently, the other game ball of the pair is shot at a normal speed and put into the game area 32. - 特許庁A string member attached to the foul ball entering the lower tray 23 from the foul ball catching unit 560 is operated from the lower tray 23 to illegally win the game ball in the game area 32 to the prize winning opening. In this fraud, the action of the hand manipulating the string member is difficult to see due to the lower tray 23, and it appears as if the game ball is brought to the upper tray 21. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the cutting mechanism 544 (first fraud countermeasure means) can often cut the string member when the string member is operated after the game ball is put into the game area 32 (even if the string member cannot be cut at the time of shooting) some), it may not be possible to cut the thread member attached to the foul ball.

As described above, between the base-side box portion 565 and the parts-side box portion 579, a gap 592 in the form of a cut (crack) is provided on the left side.
Acts as an anti-fraud measure (second anti-fraud section).

The string member attached to the foul ball that has entered the lower tray 23 through the large opening 595a of the foul ball catch unit 560 is placed on the upper end surface 580 of the part-side box portion 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base-side box portion 565. It passes through the inter-base-part channel 591 located from right to left, and passes through the central channel 590b on the right of the central channel forming portion 589 from top to bottom.
In the above fraud, if the string member attached to the foul ball is pulled out of the lower plate 23 by hand, the string member is caught in the cut-like gap 592, making it difficult to operate and move.

In addition, as described above, in order to provide the cut-like gap 592, the part-side box portion 57
The side end face 581 of 9 is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes to the left, but the inclination becomes steeper from the right to the left. Therefore, the entrance 592a of the gap 592 becomes wider, making it easier for the thread member to enter the gap 592, and the thread member attached to the foul ball moves toward the lower plate 2.
3, the thread member is gradually caught in the cut-like gap 592, and finally becomes stuck on the narrow right side of the gap 592, and further operation is impossible. Gone.

The upper end surfaces 580 and 594 may be roughened by providing a large number of unevenness in the vertical direction to increase the friction with the thread member and make it easier to entwine the thread member in the gap 592 . It is also possible to provide a slant to the side end surface of the base-side box portion 565 instead of the side end surface 581 of the part-side box portion 579 to form a cut-like gap 592 .

Next, a slit-shaped notch 596a (FIG. 16) formed in the upper portion of the right flow path forming portion 568
) becomes the third anti-fraud measure (third anti-fraud section).

A ball with a very slow firing speed (foul ball) is discharged from the small opening 595b to the right channel 590.
C and flows into the lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 . At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball may be caught in the notch 596a, making it difficult to manipulate and move thereafter. Further, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is pulled from the lower plate 23 by hand, the thread member may enter the notch 596a and be pinched.

Next, slit-like notches 597a and 597b formed around the discharge port 593 (see FIG. 1).
6) serves as a fourth anti-fraud measure (fourth anti-fraud section). In this embodiment, the notch 5
97a is provided at the right end of the right bottom surface portion 571b. The notch 597b is provided in the lower end portion of the right flow path forming portion 568 and its peripheral members.

The foul ball is finally discharged to the lower tray unit 29 through the discharge port 593 of the foul ball catch unit 560. At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball enters the slits 597a and 597b. It can become pinched and subsequently difficult to manipulate and move. Further, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is pulled from the lower plate 23 by hand, the thread member may enter the notches 597a and 597b and be pinched.

In addition, in the foul ball catching unit 560, it is also possible to provide a notch or the like in the members around other parts through which the string members attached to the foul balls pass, as countermeasures against fraud.

[Upper plate unit]
The upper tray unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view (a) of the upper tray unit 20 with the effect button unit 750 removed from the upper tray unit main body 680, and a top view of the upper tray unit 20. FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded view of the upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680). Note that the production button unit 750
Details of the (effect button 25) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680) includes a right lens member 681, a left lens member 682, an operation panel 690, an upper tray frame 700, an intermediate member 720, a button base 730, and a rear member 740. , (FIG. 19).

A right lens member 681 and a left lens member 682 are arranged in front of the upper tray frame 700, and an operation panel 690 is arranged above. Further, in the upper plate frame 700, an intermediate member 720 is arranged on the right rear side, and an LED substrate 726 is arranged on the left rear side. Further, the upper tray frame 700 has a button base 730 arranged substantially on the lower rear side, and a rear member 740 arranged further rearward. The upper plate frame 700 accommodates the intermediate member 720, the LED board 726, and the button base 730, and the operation panel 690 is mounted from above, and the rear member 7 is mounted from the rear.
40 is capped. Note that the LED substrate 726 may also be included in the category of the intermediate member 720 .

The right lens member 681 and the left lens member 682 each have a front top lens that is transparent and diffuses light from behind, and a lens frame that is arranged behind the top lens.

The operation panel 690 has a balance display section 690a on the right button installation section 691.
, a ball rental button 690b, and a return button 690c, and the left button installation portion 692 is provided with the volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e and the cross key 690f.

Further, the operation panel 690 has an annular effect button housing portion 694 that houses the effect button unit 750 . The effect button accommodating portion 694 has a surface decorated with stepped scales. A performance button unit 750 is inserted and housed in an opening 694 a of the performance button housing 694 . A front plate portion 696 forming a front portion of the effect button housing portion 694 has a sharp center portion 696a sharpened forward at the center. The front plate portion 696 includes a right plate 696b and a left plate 696b.
96c, and the point where the right plate 696b and the left plate 696c are connected is the central sharp portion 696a.
becomes.

As shown in FIG. 19, the upper tray frame 700 includes a bottom plate portion 701, a front surface portion 702 extending substantially upward from the bottom plate portion 701, and an upper plate portion 7 connected to the front surface portion 702 from behind the front surface portion 702.
03, and a substantially C-shaped operation panel housing portion 704 connected between the front portion 702 and the upper plate portion 703. As shown in FIG.

A front surface portion 702 of the upper tray frame 700 is provided with a speaker opening 702a into which the left lower speaker 19d is inserted. A right lens base 706 to which a right lens member 681 is attached from the front and a left lens base 707 to which a left lens member 682 is attached from the front are connected to the front portion 702 .

The right lens base 706 has an opening 706a through which light from each LED on the rear LED board 721 passes, and has a mounting portion 708 at the rear. The left lens base 707 is the rear LE
Apertures 707a (not shown in FIG. 19) for passing the light of each LED of D-board 726
and has a mounting portion 709 at the rear. Mounting portion 709 is attached to front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7).

In addition, a lower step portion 710 and an upper step portion 712 having a substantially L-shaped cross section in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction (the cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction) are provided at the upper center of the front face portion 702 (FIG. 23). (c) and also see FIG. 24(a)). The upper step portion 712 is formed at the upper end of the lower step portion 710. The upper step portion 712 has a saucer-like shape and is concave when viewed from the front (see also FIG. 24(a)). . The width of the upper step portion 712 in the horizontal direction is narrower than the width of the lower step portion 710 in the horizontal direction. The lower stage portion 710 and the upper stage portion 712 are arranged behind the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 so that they are covered and shielded by the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 . Therefore, unless the front panel 696 is transparent, the player can see the lower section 710 and the upper section 712 from the front.
cannot be seen. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the front plate portion 696 to be transparent in order to achieve a dramatic effect. Details of the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 will be described later.

On the right side of the upper plate portion 703 of the upper plate frame 700, an opening 703a into which the upper plate operation portion 735 is inserted from below and arranged, and a plate-like communication terminal storage space 743 (smartphone storage space) of the rear member 740 abut. and a receiving portion 703b (right end portion).

The intermediate member 720 of the upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680) has an LED board 721 arranged behind the right lens base 706 of the upper tray frame 700 on the right side, and holds the LED board 721 and extends substantially upward. and an LED board cover 723 that covers the rear. Each of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED board 721 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 706 a of the right lens base 706 . The intermediate member 720 also has a mounting portion 722 behind the LED board cover 723 . Mounting portion 722 is attached to front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7). Further, the intermediate member 720 has a receiving portion 724 that is form-fittingly received in the holding portion 736 of the upper plate operating portion 735 .

The button base 730 of the upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680)
, the opening/closing mechanism 732, the relay board 737, and the left and right reinforcing plates 739a and 739a from above.
9b (reinforcing member, reinforcing means) is installed.

The main body portion 731 includes a production button unit 750 (production button 2
5) is placed on a bottom portion 731a, a right side portion 731b provided on the right side of the bottom portion 731a,
Prepare. A box portion 731c having three rooms (spaces) partitioned by walls is provided in the center of the bottom portion 731a. A right reinforcing plate attachment portion 731 to which a right reinforcing plate 739a is attached by screwing to the right end and left end of the bottom portion 731a, respectively.
d and a left reinforcing plate attachment portion 731e to which the left reinforcing plate 739b is attached by screwing.

In the main body portion 731, a bottom portion 731a to which the production button unit 750 (production button 25) is attached, a right reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and a left reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e.
is inclined downward to the front side, and the production button unit 750 is also inclined downward to the front side as a whole,
The front part of the effect button unit 750 is arranged lower than the rear part (see also FIG. 23(b)).

The opening/closing mechanism 732 is installed on the right side portion 731b of the main body portion 731, and is operated by the player to cause the game balls on the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23, and an upper tray operation section 735. 735, an opening/closing lever 733 for moving (operating) the opening/closing member 734 in accordance with the operation of the upper tray operating section 735, and attached to the opening/closing lever 733 on the side opposite to the upper tray operating section 735. and an opening/closing member 734 which is provided with a housing. When the opening/closing member 734 is in the open state, the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23 are opened via the passage 485 (FIG. 8(d)) and the second inlet 465 (FIGS. 5(b) and 6(a)). A game ball flows down.

The relay board 737 relays a detection signal regarding the player's operation to the production button unit 750 (production button 25) to the production control device 300 (described later), or relays the production button unit 75
Power may be supplied to the LED of 0 (effect button 25).

In this embodiment, the relay board 737 includes an LED board 721, a cross key 690f, volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, and an optical sensor 77 of a button unit base 770, which will be described later.
2, etc. are electrically connected to each other.

Like the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, the volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, and the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, the structure related to the production is connected to the production control device 300 (sub board). By connecting to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) via the relay board 737, the LED board 72
1. Wiring processing for connecting each of the cross key 690f, volume control buttons 690d and 690e, and the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770 to the effect control device 300 (sub board) can be facilitated. Moreover, the space for the wiring for connecting each of these structures to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 (sub board|substrate) can be saved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the relay board 737 is not connected to the production control device 300 (sub-board) like the balance display unit 690a, the ball lending button 690b, and the return button 690c (configuration not related to production) is not electrically connected to However, even in a configuration that is not directly connected to the effect control device 300 (sub board), by electrically connecting to the relay board 737, it is temporarily aggregated on the relay board 737, and the effect control device 300 (sub board) ), the wiring may be led out to a different substrate. With such a configuration, the wiring process can be simplified, and the space for wiring can be saved.

Reinforcing plates 739a and 739b (reinforcing members, reinforcing means) reinforce the operation panel 690 by supporting the operation panel 690 from below. Reinforcing plates 739a, 739b
, when operating the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25), etc., the operation panel 6
90 can be prevented from sinking.

The rear member 740 of the upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680) includes a back plate 742, a lower speaker 19d attached from the front on the left part of the back plate 742, and an upper plate 21 provided above the back plate 742. , and a plate-like communication terminal storage space 743 above the back plate 742 and to the right of the upper plate 21 . The back plate 742 is provided with an opening 742a extending in the left-right direction through which the opening/closing member 734 can move left and right. The upper plate 21 includes an upper plate bottom portion 21a and an upper plate wall portion 21b extending substantially vertically from the upper plate bottom portion 21a.

The communication terminal storage area 743 includes three protrusions 743a, 743b, and 743c and a raised portion 74
3d, and sandwiched between the grooves between the ridges 743a and 743b, the grooves between the ridges 743b and 743c, and the grooves between the ridges 743c and the protrusions 743d, such as smartphones A communication terminal can be placed. Since each groove has a different length in the horizontal direction, it is easier to place the communication terminal according to the model (width of the communication terminal). In addition, the protrusions 743a, which form the grooves,
The lengths in the vertical direction of 743b and 743c may be different.
The different lengths in the vertical direction make it easier to place the communication terminal. The communication terminal storage area 743 is located behind the right button installation section 691 of the operation panel 690,
0 and the right lens base 706 .

[Production button unit (production button)]
With reference to FIGS. 20, 21 and 22 (see also FIG. 25(b) if necessary), details of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) will be described. FIG. 20 is an exploded view of the effect button unit 750 (the effect button 25). FIG. 21 shows the production button unit 750
It is the front view (a) and perspective view (b) of (production button 25). FIG. 22 is a plan view (a) of the production button unit 750 (production button 25) viewed from above, and a perspective view (b) showing the operation panel 690 with the production button unit 750 and the right button installation portion 691 removed.
).

The production button unit 750 (production button 25) includes a button frame 752, a button lens 754, a button lens ornament 756, an upper lens inside the button 758, a lower lens inside the button 760, a reflector 762, and a reflector 762. reflector base 764
, a button lower base 766, and a button unit base 770 (see FIG. 20).
. Between the button lens 754 and the button lower base 766, the button lens decoration 756, the button inner lens upper part 758, the button inner lens lower part 760, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 are arranged between the button lens 754 and the button lower base 766. ) are stacked in the central axis direction (see FIG. 20).

button lens 754, button lower base 766, and button lens decoration 7 between them
56 is supported by the button unit base 770 via a coil spring (elastic member) not shown in FIG. Also, as will be described later, a button frame 752 and
The button-inside lens upper portion 758, the button-inside lens lower portion 760, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 are fixed members that are fixed relative to the button unit base 770, and do not move by the player's operation. Accordingly, the movable members are the button lens 754 , the button lens ornament 756 and the button lower base 766 . These movable members are button lenses 7 of the player.
By pressing 54, it moves along the central axis direction (substantially in the vertical direction) from the initial position and sinks downward. Move up along the direction and return to the initial position.

The button frame 752 includes a front decorative portion 752a arranged on the front side and a button lens 754.
, and a receiving portion 77 on the outer side of the button unit base 770.
and a plurality of legs 752c that are inserted into and engage 0f. The button frame 752 is
The central portion is removed to form an opening 752b.
1c) is sloping radially outward, but has an overall toric shape.

A radially inner inner peripheral end 751a of the opening 752b is connected to a radially outer outer peripheral end 751a.
The inner peripheral end portion 751a is bent downward from the inclined outer peripheral surface (inclined surface 751c). The downwardly bent distal end portion is the flange portion 7 formed on the button lens main body 754a, which will be described later.
54b.

From the radially inner inner peripheral end 751a of the opening 752b to the radially outer peripheral end 751
The inclined surface 751c directed toward b is formed at an angle that is gently continuous with the inclined surface of the button lens 754 formed in a convex shape, which will be described later. It is designed to make the boundary part look natural.

Also, the front decorative portion 752 a is arranged above the central sharp portion 696 a of the operation panel 690 . The button frame 752 is fixed to the button unit base 770 by a plurality of legs 752c, and does not move when the player operates the button lens 754. FIG.

The button lens 754 is engaged with an annular portion 766b (wall portion) of a pot-shaped (tub-shaped) button lower base 766 . The button lens 754 has a circular button lens body 754a that rises in the center in a mountain shape, and a flange part 754b that has an L-shaped cross section in the radial direction of the button lens 754 at the bottom of the button lens body 754a. , provided. An outer peripheral groove 754c is formed between the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754a and the flange portion 754b. The button lens main body 754 a is formed in an opening 752 formed in the button frame 752 .
part of the flange portion 754b (outer wall portion of the outer peripheral groove 754c)
is located below the inner peripheral edge 751a of the button frame 752. As shown in FIG. For this reason, even if the button lens 754 is biased by the coil spring, the button lens 754 pops out above the button frame 752 by a part of the flange portion 754b coming into contact with the inner peripheral end portion 751a of the opening portion 752b. never

As shown in FIGS. 21(b) and 22(a), the flange portion 754b has notches on both sides in the left-right direction of the button lens body 754a so that the outer peripheral grooves 754c are opened radially outward. A recessed side notch 754f (described below) is formed. Side notch 7
A screw receiving portion 754e (described later) is formed at the position 54f. Further, in front of the button lens main body 754a, the flange portion 754b is formed with a front notch portion 754g (described later) which is notched so that the outer peripheral groove 754c is opened radially outward. The side notch portion 754f and the front notch portion 754g are formed in circumferential positions aligned with the lateral guide port 766i and the front guide port 766g, respectively, formed in the button lower base 766 (see also FIG. 21). reference).

In addition, in the button lens body 754a, a flange portion 754b is recessed radially inward between the position of the side cutout portion 754f in which the screw receiving portion 754e is formed and the position of the front cutout portion 754g. A flange recess 754h is formed. Moreover, the flange concave portion 7
54h is also formed at a line-symmetrical position with respect to a straight line connecting the side cutouts 754f formed in the left-right direction. These flange recesses 754 h form avoiding portions that avoid leg portions 752 c extending downward from button frame 752 toward receiving portion 770 f of button unit base 770 . Note that FIG. 22(a) shows the button unit base 77 for convenience of explanation.
Receptacle 770f at 0 is also shown.

In the button lens body 754a, peripheral portions of the button lens body 754a such as the outer peripheral groove 754c, the flange portion 754b, the screw receiving portion 754e, and the flange recess portion 754h are shielded by the button frame 752 described above so as not to be visually recognized by the player. ing. Therefore, as will be described later, when a fluid is dropped onto the effect button unit 750 and flows, the button frame 752 constitutes shielding means for shielding the fluid flowing around the effect button unit 750 from the player.

As shown in FIG. 20, the button lens ornament 756 has a wristwatch-like shape as a whole, and includes a character portion 756a indicating the characters "PUSH", a circular button lens ornament main body 756b, and left and right band portions 756c. , left and right band end portions 756d, and left and right button lens engaging portions 756e. Since the button lens 754 is transparent, the characters "PUSH" of the character portion 756a arranged under the button lens 754 can be visually recognized. The left and right button lens engaging portions 756e are engaged with an annular ring portion 766b (wall portion) of a pot-shaped button lower base 766. As shown in FIG.

The button-inside lens upper portion 758, the button-inside lens lower portion 760, and the reflector 762 are combined to form an assembly (see FIG. 25(b)). A button inner lens upper portion 758 having a disk-like shape has a plurality of (eight) protrusions 758a protruding radially outward on its outer peripheral surface. The protrusions 758a, which are equally spaced at an angle of 45 degrees, each have a locking portion 758b on the lower side, for a total of four locking portions 758b. Each engaging portion 758b is inserted into a corresponding groove-shaped receiving portion 760b of a lower button-in-lens lower portion 760 so that the light-transmitting upper in-button lens upper portion 758 and the light-transmitting lower in-button lens upper portion 758 are connected to each other. Lower portion 760 is combined.

In addition, a reflector 762 is attached from below to the button inner lens upper portion 758 by screwing. The reflector 762 can be made of metal or have a metal plated surface to reflect light. A button-in-lens lower portion 760 having a generally cylindrical shape accommodates a reflector 762 therein. The button-inside lens lower portion 760 includes two eaves portions 760a arranged at an angular interval of 180 degrees, and a leg portion 760c extending below each eaves portion 760a.

The reflector base 764 has an opening 764e at the bottom, has a truncated mortar shape, and has a substantially conical inner surface. The reflector base 764 is made of metal or metal plated on the inner surface. The reflector base 764 is subjected to irregular reflection processing, and has irregularities 764a arranged radially in the radial direction to diffusely reflect light.

The reflector base 764 includes an engagement receiving portion 764b with which each leg portion 760c of the button inner lens lower portion 760 engages. As a result, the button inner lens lower portion 7 is attached to the reflector base 764 .
60 is placed. Here, the lower end portion of the button inner lens lower portion 760 is the reflector base 7 .
64 (defining opening 764e), and reflector 762
is inserted into the opening 764e (see FIGS. 23(b) and 25(b)).

In addition, the reflector base 764 is provided with fitting portions 764c at the outer peripheral end into which each band end portion 756d of the button lens ornament 756 is slidably fitted. As a result, the reflector base 7
64 will be sandwiched between two band ends 756 d of button lens ornament 756 . When the player presses the button lens 754, each band end portion 756d slides in the fitting portion 764c as a groove in the central axis direction (substantially vertically).

Further, the reflector base 764 has a leg 764 d that penetrates the button lower base 766 and engages the button unit base 770 . As a result, the reflector base 764 , the lens upper part 758 in the button, the lens lower part 760 in the button, and the reflector 762
are fixed to the button unit base 770 .

The button lower base 766 has a pot-like (tub-like) shape, and includes a disk-shaped bottom portion 766a, an annular portion 766b extending vertically upward from the bottom portion 766a, and an annular portion 766b extending vertically upward from the bottom portion 766a. and a collar portion 766c (flange portion) extending radially outward from the upper end portion of the portion 766b. The button lower base 766 has an accommodating portion 766d formed radially inward of the annular portion 766b.
The LED substrate 767 is accommodated in the bottom portion 766a of the . Collar portion 766c of button lower base 766
(flange portion) contacts the flange portion 754 b of the button lens 754 .

The disk-shaped LED board 767 has one center LED 767a arranged in the center and eight peripheral LEDs 767b arranged in an annular shape around it. The LED board 767 has
The lower end of the reflector 762 and the lower end of the reflector base 764 (around the opening 764e) are in contact with each other. A center LED 767 a is arranged to surround the lower end of the reflector 762 , and eight peripheral LEDs 767 b are arranged to surround the lower end of the reflector 762 . That is, the central LED 767a is arranged radially inside the lower end of the reflector 762,
The peripheral LED 767b is arranged radially outside the lower end of the reflector 762 and radially inside the lower end of the reflector base 764 (see FIG. 25(b)).

The direct light from the central LED 767a and the indirect light reflected by the reflector 762 mainly pass through the substantially transparent button inner lens upper part 758, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and reach the production button unit 750. go outside of The direct light from the peripheral LED 767b and the indirect light reflected by the reflector base 764 mainly pass through the button inner lens lower part 760, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and reach the outside of the effect button unit 750. go out to

The ring portion 766b of the button lower base 766 has button lens decorations 75 on both sides in the left-right direction.
6, and a screw hole portion 766 for screwing the screw receiving portion 754e in contact with the screw receiving portion 754e.
f (female screw), and a concave lateral guide port 766i that is arranged to face the engagement receiving portion 766e and the screw hole portion 766f radially outward.

A screw receiving portion 754e formed on the button lens main body 754a is screwed into the screw hole portion 766f so that the flange portion 754b of the button lens 754 is attached to the button lower base 766.
is pressed against the collar portion 766c (flange portion) of the . Further, the button lens engaging portion 756e formed on the button lens ornament 756 consists of an engaging receiving portion 766e positioned below the button lens engaging portion 756e and a screw screw positioned above the button lens engaging portion 756e. Receiving portion 754e
and fixed (see FIG. 21(b)).

The screw hole portion 766f is arranged across the engagement receiving portion 766e and the bottom portion of the lateral guide port 766i,
The opening of the screw hole is formed to be slightly convex upward. Also, the screw hole portion 7
66f is formed to have an outer diameter size that can be accommodated in the screw receiving portion 754e formed in the button lens body 754a when viewed from above. Since the screw receiving portion 754e is inserted into the concave lateral guiding port 766i, the screw receiving portion 754e also functions to position the button lens 754 in the circumferential direction when it is attached to the button lower base 766. FIG.

As will be described later, the lateral guide port 766i allows the flowable fluid (liquid, etc.) dripped onto the effect button unit 750 to flow through the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 into the upper tray unit main body 68.
0 is guided without passing through the production button unit 750. - 特許庁

Note that any fluid (liquid, etc.) that has fallen onto the button lens 754 will
surface toward the outer peripheral surface 754d and enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. Also, the operation panel 69
Fluid (liquid, etc.) falling on 0 may descend the surface of the effect button housing portion 694, go over the button frame 752, and enter the outer circumferential groove 754c if the amount is large. Since the effect button unit 750 placed on the bottom portion 731a of the button base 730 which is inclined downward to the front side is inclined downward to the front side, as shown in FIG. ) flows into the lateral guide port 766i over the screw receiving portion 754e. It should be noted that the fluid from the lateral guide port 766i
2 is placed in the panel-side concave portion 694b (see FIG. 22 (
b)). In addition, in the flange concave portion 754h, the peripheral groove 754c has a narrow gap (it can be widened) through which the fluid passes. However, the fluid does not flow into the flange recess 754h
over the top of the button frame 752 and the channel formed between the inner peripheral edge 751a of the button frame 752 and the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754a.

In addition, the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 has a concave shape at the front position on the outer peripheral surface, and protrudes radially outward of the annular portion 766b from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. A front guide port 766g is formed (see FIG. 21). In this embodiment, the front guide port 766g is formed in the frontmost portion of the outer peripheral surface. The collar portion 766c (flange portion) is notched at a position corresponding to the front guide port 766g. For this reason, the front guide port 766g
is open above.

Further, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave protruding portion forming the front guide port 766g. Each of the ribs 776 is formed to extend in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 extends downward from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. It is formed to be taller.

With this structure, the front guiding port 766g allows fluid such as liquid to flow from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 to the inside of the upper tray unit main body 680, as will be described later.
Guide without passing through the inside. At this time, each of the three ribs 776 is positioned under the button base 766.
The front notch portion 7 of the button lens 754 is inserted through the notch of the flange portion 766c (flange portion) of the button lens 754.
It facilitates the flow of fluids (such as liquids) from 54g into the front guide port 766g. In addition, since the production button unit 750 is inclined downward to the front side, the horizontal guide port 766 is opened as shown in FIG. 22(a).
A fluid (liquid or the like) that has entered the outer peripheral groove 754c located forward of i (forward of the dotted line) flows from the front notch 754g to the front guide port 766g.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the button lower base 766 includes a light blocking plate 768 extending downward from the bottom portion 766a and four spring shafts 766h. The light shielding plate 768 moves downward together with the button lower base 766 when the player presses the button lens 754.
It is detected by the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770 (the effect button switch 25a). The spring shaft 766h is housed in a spring chamber 770d of the button unit base 770 together with a coil spring (not shown).

The button unit base 770 includes a housing frame 770a that houses the motor 771, a lower wall portion 770b and an upper wall portion 770c that extend downward or upward from the housing frame 770a along the central axis direction (generally vertical direction), Prepare. A storage frame 770 a is mounted on the bottom portion 731 a of the button base 730 . Lower outer wall portion 770 b connects to button base 730 . The upper outer wall portion 770c is arranged around the ring portion 766b of the button lower base 766 so as to face the ring portion 766b (FIG. 25(b)).

In addition, the button unit base 770 includes four spring chambers 770d that accommodate spring shafts 766h to which coil springs are attached, vertical holes 770e into which the legs 764d of the reflector base 764 are inserted, and legs of the button frame 752. Receiving portion 770 to which 752c is attached
and f. Thereby, the button frame 752 and the reflector base 764 are fixed to the button unit base 770, and the button lower base 766 is fixed to the button unit base 77.
0 is movably supported.

Further, the button unit base 770 has a plurality of cushioning members 773 that cushion the button unit base 770 when the button lower base 766 that has sunk due to the button lens 754 being pressed by the player collides with the button unit base 770 . The button unit base 770 has an optical sensor 772 that detects the light blocking plate 768 (described above) of the button lower base 766 when the button lower base 766 sinks due to the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754 . The optical sensor 772 functions as a later-described effect button switch 25a which is turned on when the light shielding plate 768 blocks the light generated from the light emitting section and the light receiving section cannot receive the light.

The operation of the motor 771 housed in the housing frame 770a causes the whole production button unit 750 (production button 25) to vibrate, and the operation promotion notification prompting the player to operate the production button unit 750 (production button 25). can perform the performance. button base 73
The 0 box portion 731c is arranged below the motor 771 and can absorb the noise of the motor 771 .

[First reservoir (water reservoir)]
The first reservoir 713 (water reservoir) of the upper tray unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a front view (a) of the upper tray unit 20, a cross-sectional view (b) of the cross section taken along the line AA of the front view (a) seen from the left side, and an enlarged main part of the cross-sectional view (b). Enlarged view of main parts (
c). 24 is a top view of the upper tray unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18(b)).
FIG. 4A is a cross-sectional view of the cross section taken along line A seen from the back side, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23(a) to 23(c), the upper tray unit 20 has a front notch 754g formed in the button lens body 754 and a front guiding port 766g formed in the button lower base 766. is assembled so as to face the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752. As shown in FIG. In addition, a sharp center portion 696a formed on the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690
Then, the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 formed on the upper plate frame 700 are assembled so as to face each other. In addition, the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 is enlarged, and the lower portion 7
10 and the upper stage portion 712, or the central pointed portion 696a of the operation panel 690 may be elongated to face the front guide port 766g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), in the button base 730 (body portion 731), the upper end of the bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is attached, the right reinforcing plate attaching portion 731d, and the left reinforcing plate attaching portion 731d. The portion 731e is inclined downward to the front side with respect to the bottom plate portion 701, and is given an inclination angle such that the front portion of the effect button unit 750 is arranged lower than the rear portion. That is, the effect button unit 750 is inclined so that the player-side end is lower than the board-side end.

As shown in FIGS. 19, 23(a), and 24(a), the lower portion 710 formed in the upper tray frame 700 is formed between the right lens base 706 and the left lens base 7 of the upper tray frame 700.
07, that is, approximately in the front center of the gaming machine, and formed in the portion of the upper tray frame 700 protruding toward the player side. The lower portion 710 includes bottom surfaces 710a and 710b extending from the player side of the upper tray frame 700 toward the inner side of the gaming machine and a rear surface 710 extending upward from the gaming machine.
c.

When the central sharp portion 696a of the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 is transparent, the lower step portion 710
are visible to the player. In this case, bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower part 710 are formed in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the player side, and a right lens base 706 extending rightward of the upper tray frame 700 and a left lens base 706 extending leftward. The design continues with the base 707 .

In addition, the tip portion 710d near the apex of the substantially V shape of the lower portion 710 is formed to protrude most forward (toward the player), and as described above, the tip portion 710d has a cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction. presents a substantially L-shape.

The upper part 712 is formed continuously from the upper end 710u of the back part 710c of the lower part 710, and includes a bottom surface 712a extending from the player side to the back side of the gaming machine, and a back surface 712a extending upward from the gaming machine.
2b. Moreover, the upper stage part 712 is provided with partition parts 712c and 712d in the left-right direction. The upper stage portion 712 has a saucer-like shape with a bottom surface 712a, a back surface 712b, and partition portions 712c and 712d, and is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front (FIG. 21(a)).
and also FIG. 24(a)). The width of the upper step portion 712 in the horizontal direction (the interval between the partition portions 712c and 712d) is narrower than the width of the widest portion of the V-shaped lower step portion 710 in the horizontal direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(c), in the front portion of the effect button unit 750 in the state where each part of the upper tray unit 20 is assembled, the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754 is
, the outside of the front guide port 766g formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766, and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled to shield them.
1 is formed. In addition, water does not enter behind the dotted line in FIG. 24(c). The communication space S1 between the movable members (the button lens 754, the button lower base 766) and the fixed member (the button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is part of the fluid flow path (arrow in FIG. 23(c)). configure. In the communication space S1, the width of the channel is widened according to the movement of the movable member downward from the initial position by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754, thereby facilitating the flow of the fluid.

Also, the button base 730 and the production button unit 750 (the button unit base 77
0) are located at the forefront of the upper tray frame 700, and an upper stage 712
and the inside of the sharp center portion 696a of the operation panel 690, a communicating space S2 is formed. The communication space S2 is formed between the upper tray frame 700 and the operation panel 690, and is fixed, so that the width of the flow passage does not increase according to the movement of the movable member.

Here, the communication space S1 constitutes delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid. Communication space S
2 constitutes a first reservoir 713 (delay means) that delays the flow of the fluid. Note that the delay of the fluid includes evaporation of the fluid accumulated in the first reservoir 713 from a gap in the constituent members of the upper tray unit main body 680 (for example, the flow path to the first reservoir 713). good too.

23(c), the lower edge 753 of the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 and the upper edge 698a of the central sharp portion 696a are in contact with each other, and the central sharp portion of the operation panel 690 is in contact with the upper edge 698a. The lower edge 698b of 696a and the tip portion 710d of the upper tray frame 700 are in contact with each other. Therefore, the communication space S1 and the communication space S2 are isolated from the outside of the gaming machine, and the fluid does not flow out of the gaming machine.

20 and 21, the effect button unit 750 has an outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens main body 754a, and the front notch 7 is provided on the front side of the outer peripheral groove 754c.
54 g are formed. The front notch 754g is assembled in alignment with a front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766. As shown in FIG. Also, as described above, FIG.
As shown in (b) and (c), on the front side (player side) of the upper tray unit 20, a front notch 754g, a front guide port 766g, and a lower step portion 71 formed in the upper tray frame 700.
0 and the upper part 712 are the front decorative part 752a of the button frame 752, the operation panel 6
90 is assembled so as to face the central sharpened portion 696a formed on the front plate portion 696 of 90. As shown in FIG.

According to such a structure, in the front portion of the effect button unit 750, the front notch portion 754g of the outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens 754 and the front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766 serve as operation means. It is possible to configure a flow means that allows the fluid that flows around the button lens 754 to flow inside the gaming machine.

In addition, the communicating space S1 formed between the outside of the front guide port 766g and the inside of the button frame 752, and/or the outside of the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 and the inside of the central sharp portion 696a. The communicating space S2 can constitute delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid flowed by the flow means.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid dropped onto the effect button 25, the surface of the button lens 754, which is inclined forward (toward the player), flows forward. and flows into the outer peripheral groove 754 c of the button lens 754 . The fluid that has flowed into the outer peripheral groove 754c flows forward, passes through the front notch 754g and the front guide port 766g, and flows into the communication space S1. As a result, the inflow of the fluid into the game machine (inside the upper tray unit 20) is delayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the communication space S2 (first
It flows into the storage section 713) and is stored therein. In the communicating space S<b>2 (first reservoir 713 ), the fluid accumulates from the top of the lowermost portion 710 and then accumulates on the upper portion 712 . When the volume of the fluid is large, after the communication space S2 is filled with the fluid, the fluid further crosses over the upper stage portion 712, travels along the back side of the upper stage portion 712, and reaches the bottom plate portion of the upper tray frame 700. It can accumulate in the space on 701 and between the front part 702 and the button base 730 . That is, this space constitutes the third reservoir as delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid.

[Second Reservoir (Water Reservoir)]
The second reservoirs 777a and 777b (water reservoirs) of the upper tray unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view (a) of the top view of the upper tray unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18(b)) taken along the line A--A as viewed from the front, and an enlarged view of the main part of the cross-sectional view (a). It is a part enlarged view (b). FIG. 26 is an enlarged view (a) of a right main part showing an enlarged right side of a cross section of the production button unit 750 and its peripheral parts cut along the diameter direction, and an enlarged view of a left main part showing an enlarged left side. FIG. 7B and top views (c) and (d) showing a main part of the button base 730. FIG.

20, 21, and 23, the upper tray unit 20 includes a front notch 754g formed in the button lens main body 754 and a front guide opening formed in the button lower base 766. 766g and the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 positionally correspond to each other. assembled accordingly. A lateral notch 754f formed in the left-right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and a lateral guide opening 766i of the button lower base 766 are also formed so as to correspond to each other.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), an opening wall 695 defining an opening 694a formed in the effect button housing portion 694 of the operation panel 690 has an outer peripheral end portion 751b of the button frame 752.
A button frame placing portion 694c for supporting the is provided. The button frame placement portion 694c is formed to protrude radially toward the center of the substantially circular opening 694a. In addition, the button frame mounting portion 694c has radially outer (left and right A panel-side recess 694b recessed toward the direction outside) is formed. In this embodiment, the panel-side recess 694b accommodates a portion of the lateral guide port 766i, but the lateral guide port 766i is not accommodated radially away from the panel-side recess 694b so as to widen the flow path of the fluid. can be

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25(b) and 26(a) (also refer to FIG. 19), the bottom portion 731a of the button base 730 is formed in a concave shape surrounded by side walls. Also, the bottom portion 731a
In the central area of , partitions 732a and 732b that support the effect button unit 750 and partition the bottom 731a extend from the front side to the back side. Moreover, the partitions 732a, 73
Partitions 732c and 732d extending in the left-right direction are formed to partition the space between 2b. The aforementioned box portion 731c includes partition portions 732a and 732b, partition portions 732c and 732c and
32d.

As a result, a bottom surrounding portion 730a is formed in the bottom portion 731a between the partition portion 732a and the bottom side wall 732e. Also, a bottom enclosing portion 730b is formed between the partition 732b and the bottom side wall 732f.

In addition, in the bottom portion 731a, the bottom portion surrounding portion 730a and the bottom portion surrounding portion 730b are each provided with the spring chamber 77 of the button unit base 770 in the effect button unit 750.
A spring chamber receiving portion 732g for supporting 0d is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom portion 731a.

Outside the bottom side wall 732e on the right side, a base portion 730c is formed at a position lower than the upper end of the bottom side wall 732e and higher than the bottom surface of the bottom portion 731a. In the base part 730c,
A platform surrounding portion 730e surrounded by side walls is formed. A right reinforcing plate attachment portion 731d to which the lower end of the right reinforcing plate 739a is attached is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom enclosing portion 730e in the base enclosing portion 730e.

Similarly, a base portion 730d is formed on the outside of the left bottom side wall 732f, and a base portion surrounding portion 730f is formed on the base portion 730d. In the base enclosing portion 730f,
A reinforcing plate attachment portion 731e is erected upward from the bottom surface of the base portion surrounding portion 730f.

As shown in FIGS. 25(b) and 26(a), on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the radially inner inner peripheral end 751a of the opening 752b of the button frame 752 is bent downward, The tip portion contacts a flange portion 754b formed on the button lens main body 754a. Further, the outer peripheral end portion 751b on the radially outer side abuts on a button frame mounting portion 694c formed in the opening portion 694a of the operation panel 690. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, the side notch 754 formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens body 754a
f and the outside of the lateral guide port 766i formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766;
A communicating space S3 is formed between the inner side of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754a. In other words, the communication space S3 is provided between the button frame 752 and the portion (the lateral guide port 766i, etc.) installed to face the button frame 752. As shown in FIG.

In this way, the communication space S3 between the movable member (button lens 754) and the fixed member (button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is the fluid flow path (arrow in FIG. 26(a)).
form part of The communication space S3 can be opened by pressing the button lens 754 by the player.
As the movable member moves downward from the initial position, the width of the flow path widens, making it easier for the fluid to flow.

In addition, the radially outer side of the button unit base 770 and the right reinforcing plate 739a (and the opening) pass between the radially outer side of the button lower base 766 and the panel side recess 694b and the opening wall 695 formed in the operation panel 690. A communication space S4 is formed to connect with the wall 695). That is, the communication space S4 is provided between the operation panel 690 and a portion (the button lower base 766, etc.) installed to face the operation panel 690, and the operation panel 69
0 and a portion (button unit base 770, etc.) installed to face the right reinforcing plate 739a.

The communication space S4 also constitutes a part of the fluid flow path (arrow in FIG. 26(a)). Communication space S
4 is further connected to a base enclosing portion 730e formed with a right reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d.

The communication space S4 between the movable member (lower button base 766) and the fixed member (operation panel 690) of the effect button unit 750 moves the movable member downward from the initial position by pressing the button lens 754 of the player. However, if a fluid exists, the fluid is pushed or drawn into the movable member (bottom bottom base 766) to facilitate the flow. A communication space S4 between the button unit base 770 and the right reinforcing plate 739a or the operation panel 690 is fixed and does not change according to the movement of the movable member.

Similarly, on the left side of the effect button unit 750, the side notch 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens body 754a and the annular portion 76 of the button lower base 766
6b and the outer peripheral surface 754 of the button lens main body 754a.
A communication space S5 is formed between the inner side of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover d. A movable member (button lens 754) and a fixed member (
The communication space S5 between the button frames 752) constitutes part of the fluid flow path (arrow in FIG. 26(b)). In the communication space S5, the width of the channel is widened according to the downward movement of the movable member from the initial position by the player's operation of pressing the button lens 754, and the fluid flows easily.

In addition, it passes between the radially outer side of the button lower base 766, the panel side recess 694b formed in the opening 694a of the operation panel 690, and the opening wall 695, and the radially outer side of the button unit base 770 and the left reinforcing plate. 739b, a communication space S6 is formed. The communication space S6 is further connected to a base portion surrounding portion 730f in which a left reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e is formed.

The communication space S6 between the movable member (lower button base 766) and the fixed member (operation panel 690) of the effect button unit 750 moves the movable member downward from the initial position by pressing the button lens 754 of the player. However, if a fluid exists, the fluid is pushed or drawn into the movable member (bottom bottom base 766) to facilitate the flow. A communication space S6 between the button unit base 770 and the left reinforcing plate 739b is
It is fixed and does not change as the movable member moves.

According to such a structure, in the lateral side portion of the production button unit 750,
A side notch portion 754f of the button lens 754 and a lateral guide port 766i formed in the button lower base 766 allow fluid flowing around the button lens 754 as an operation means to flow into the game machine. Flow means can be configured.

Communication spaces S3 and S5 formed between the outside of the lateral guide port 766i and the inside of the button frame 752, communication spaces S4 and S6 formed between the operation panel 690 and the outside of the effect button unit 750, and Alternatively, the base enclosing portion 730e and the bottom enclosing portion 730f can constitute delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid flowed by the flow means described above.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid (such as a liquid) that spreads and flows on the surface of the effect button 25, it flows into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 from the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens 754. can do. Also, the operation panel 690
If the amount of fluid (liquid etc.) flowing down the surface of the effect button housing part 694 is large,
It may go over the button frame 752 and enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. Fluid that has flowed into the outer peripheral groove 754c behind the lateral guide port 766i (behind the dotted line in FIG. 22(a)) flows into the side notch 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c and the circle of the button lower base 766. It flows into the communication spaces S3 and S5 through the lateral guide port 766i formed in the ring portion 766b. In addition, Figure 2
As shown in 6(a) and 26(b), the fluid flows into the communication spaces S4 and S6,
As shown in the shaded area of 6(d), it is stored in the base portion surrounding portion 730e and the base portion surrounding portion 730f. Then, as shown in the shaded area in FIG. 26(c), the capacity of the flowing fluid is
30e and the capacity of the base enclosure 730f is exceeded, the fluid is directed to the bottom enclosure 730.
a and bottom enclosing portion 730b. Note that the partitions 732a, 732
A fluid does not flow into the box portion 731c formed by b and the like.

In this way, the base portion surrounding portion 730e and the base portion surrounding portion 730f can constitute the second storage portions 777a and 777b (delay means) that delay the flow of the fluid. Also, the bottom enclosing portion 730a and the bottom enclosing portion 730b can constitute additional reservoirs 778a, 778b (delaying means for delaying the flow of fluid) as buffers for the second reservoirs 777a, 777b.

In addition, when the volume of the fluid is large, the bottom enclosing portion 730a and the bottom enclosing portion 730b
After (reservoirs 778a, 778b) are filled with fluid, the fluid is
0a and the upper end portion of the wall in front of the bottom enclosing portion 730b, along the front side of the wall in front of the bottom enclosing portion 730a and the bottom enclosing portion 730b, the third storage portion (upper tray frame 700)
can accumulate in the space between the front surface portion 702 and the button base 730 on the bottom plate portion 701 of . That is, the third storage part includes the above-described communication space S2 and the bottom surrounding portion 7.
A common buffer reservoir for 30a and bottom enclosing portion 730b may be configured.
Note that the base portion surrounding portion 730e and the base portion surrounding portion 730f (the second storage portions 777a and 777b
) (the lower portion not covered by the reinforcing plates 739a and 739b), along the surface of the button base 730, the fluid may drop (flow down) into the third reservoir.

[Fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port)]
The fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view illustrating the discharge port 779. FIG. As described above, it flows into the communication space S1 and the communication space S2.
The fluid stored in (the first storage part 713) passes through the communication spaces S3 and S5, and passes through the communication space S4.
, S6, the base portion surrounding portion 730e and the base portion surrounding portion 730f (the second storage portion 777
a, 777b) or the bottom enclosing portion 730a and the bottom enclosing portion 7
30b (preliminary storage portions 778a, 778b) may be provided with a discharge port 779 for discharging the fluid stored in the gaming machine to the outside. In the present embodiment, "storing the fluid inside the gaming machine and discharging the stored fluid outside the gaming machine" is included in "delaying the flow of the fluid". It should be noted that the upper tray unit 20 is not provided with a special discharge port 779.
The fluid may be gradually discharged to the outside of the game machine through a minute gap between the constituent members (for example, a gap caused by the tolerance between the operation panel 690 and the upper tray frame 700).

As shown in FIG. 27, the discharge port 779 is formed in a lower portion of the front surface portion 702 of the upper tray frame 700 at a position near the operating handle 24 (on the right side). The outlet 779 is
It is provided in the vicinity of the right protrusion 29b that protrudes on the right side of the lower tray unit 29 so as to face the right protrusion 29b. The discharge port 779 is connected to the communication space S2 (first storage portion 713), the base portion surrounding portion 7
30e and a base portion surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a and 777b), a bottom portion surrounding portion 73
0a and the bottom enclosing portion 730b (preliminary storage portions 778a, 778b) are communicated by a flow path formed so as to be invisible to the player inside the gaming machine. For example, the communication space S2 (
A flow path (groove) from the first storage portion 713 ) to the discharge port 779 is formed by
02 (dotted line in FIG. 27).

In this embodiment, the discharge port 779 is formed at a position near the operation handle 24 of the front surface portion 702 of the upper tray frame 700 because the lower tray 23 in which game balls are stored and the operation panel 69
This is to avoid the discharged fluid from reaching the switches at 0. If the game balls enter the game area in a wet state, it may accelerate the deterioration of members such as nails and the circulation structure of the game balls. Therefore, the discharge port 779 is not limited to the position described above as long as the discharged fluid does not interfere with the game balls, the operation panel of the game machine, the island facilities, and the like.

Further, the discharge port 779 may be provided with a sealable sealing material so that the discharge port can be opened as necessary. Also, the discharge port 779 may be a mechanism that can be opened only by an administrator as needed.

[Spherical channel unit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31, the spherical flow path unit 783 arranged on the back side of the front frame 12 will be described. FIG. 28 is a rear view (a) and a sectional top view (b) of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12). FIG. 29 shows the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12
) is an exploded view of FIG. FIG. 30 is an exploded view of the spherical flow path unit 783. FIG. FIG. 31 is a rear view (a) and a see-through front view (b) of the spherical flow path unit base 786. FIG.

The front frame 12 has, on the back side, an external information terminal 71 capable of outputting information about the game machine 10 to an external device (game hall internal management device such as a hall computer), and a game machine replenished from a replenishment device installed in the island facility. An upper tank 448 for storing balls, a payout unit 780 for putting out game balls flowing down from the upper tank 448 to the upper tray 21, a payout control device 200 for controlling the payout unit 780, and a power supply for supplying power to various devices. and a device 400 (FIG. 28 (
a)).

In addition, the front frame 12 also includes an effect control relay board 781 and an inter-stand relay board 782 on the back side. The effect control relay board 781 has a connection part for effect connected to the electric wiring from the effect control device 300 and the like. The inter-stand relay board 782 is a board electrically connected to an inter-stand device arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10 . Note that the inter-machine device is, for example, a card sandwich or a cash sandwich arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10 . In addition, the payout control device 200, the power supply device 400, the performance control relay board 781, and the inter-stand relay board 782 may be configured as one unit (FIG. 29).

As described above, the front frame 12 has the ball launcher 530 and the foul ball catch unit 560 on the front side (FIG. 28(b)).

The front frame 12 includes a ball channel unit 783 between the power supply device 400 and the foul ball catch unit 560, and a ball launcher 530 between the payout control device 200 and the ball launcher 530.
It has a launch control device 784 (launch control board) that controls the . The ball channel unit 783 and the firing control device 784 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction (Fig. 28(b), Fig. 29).

As will be described later, the ball flow path unit 783 receives game balls that have flowed down from the out port 30b of the game board 30 and flows them into the out tank. In addition, the ball flow path unit 783 is the dispensing unit 7
The game ball (prize ball) from 80 is supplied to the upper tray 21 through the prize ball outlet 443, or the upper tray 21
becomes full, the game balls from the payout unit 780 are supplied to the lower tray 23 through the first inlet 461 of the lower tray unit 29.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 30, the spherical flow path unit 783 includes a front lid member 785, a spherical flow path unit base 786 that abuts the front lid member 785 from behind, and a rear lid member that abuts the spherical flow path unit base 786 from behind. 787 and. The ball passage unit base 786 is sandwiched between the front lid member 785 and the rear lid member 787 from the front and rear, and various game ball passages are formed inside.

The front lid member 785 has a recessed receiving portion 785a into which the prize ball payout port 443 of the ball passage unit base 786 is fitted. Further, as will be described later, the front cover member 785 has out-sphere flow paths 785b and 785c formed by flow path walls extending on the rear surface (FIG. 31(b)).

As shown in FIG. 30, the ball passage unit base 786 has an upper left connection passage 786a connected to the lower portion of the payout unit 780 and supplied with game balls (prize balls) from the payout unit 780. As shown in FIG. In addition, the spherical flow path unit base 786 has an intermediate plate 786 disposed substantially in the middle in the front-rear direction.
b. On the front side forward of the intermediate plate 786b, the ball passage unit base 786 has a prize ball payout port 443 into which game balls from the connection passage 786a flow, and a game board 30 that opens upward.
Out ball receiving port 786g for receiving the game ball flowing down from the out port 30b, and out sensor 786h for detecting the out ball. The prize ball payout port 443 is a rectangular opening when viewed from the front, and opens at the front and the intermediate plate 786b. The out sensor 786h may be used as an out ball detection switch 74, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), on the rear surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball passage unit base 786 includes a shelf portion 786c for receiving game balls (prize balls) from the connection passage 786a, and a shelf portion 786c.
An overflow passage 786d into which the game balls from the connection passage 786a flow when the game balls overflow the game balls 86c is provided. The game balls that have entered the shelf 786 c flow into the prize ball payout port 443 . The game balls from the prize ball payout port 443 are further supplied to the prize ball inlet 484 of the upper tray 21. - 特許庁
When the upper plate 21 is full (full), the game balls overflow to the shelf 786c (overflow), so the game balls from the connection passage 786a cannot enter the shelf 786c, and overflow passage 786d. (arrow in FIG. 31(a)). Overflow channel 786d
is formed by the channel wall extending behind the intermediate plate 786b. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the overflow flow path 786d passes through the lower tray 23 through the first inlet 461 of the lower tray unit 29.
supplied to

Furthermore, on the rear surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball passage unit base 786 includes an overflow sensor 786e for detecting the collision pressure (ball pressure) of the game ball (overflow ball) in the overflow passage 786d, and an overflow sensor. and a ball pressure receiving member 786f that is superimposed on the left side of 786e. The ball pressure receiving member 786f
The notch on the right end of 6d is faced in a swingable state by the support shaft at the upper end. The overflow sensor 786e sends out a signal to the game control device 100 when the ball pressure receiving member 786f is pressed toward the right side by ball pressure.

In addition, the spherical flow path unit base 786 includes a special flow path 786i formed substantially parallel to the overflow flow path 786d on the rear surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b. For example, the special flow path 786i may be used as a recovery flow path for opening the valve of the upper tank 448 to flow down the game balls from the upper tank 448 and recover them to the outside of the gaming machine 10 . A special channel 786i is also formed by channel walls that extend behind the intermediate plate 786b.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the front cover member 785 has a channel wall extending on the rear surface, and an upper out ball channel 785b and a lower out ball channel 785c are formed. A game ball (out ball) from the out ball receiving port 786g flows into the upper out ball flow path 785b. upper out ball flow path 7
A game ball that has passed through the upper out ball flow path 785b flows into the lower out ball flow path 785c communicating with 85b, and is then collected in the out tank. The above-described out sensor 786h (out ball detection switch 74) provided in the ball flow path unit base 786 is arranged at the connecting portion between the upper out ball flow path 785b and the lower out ball flow path 785c.

[Viewing window]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the visual recognition window portion 789 provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) will be described. FIG. 32 is a right side view (a) and a partially enlarged view (b) thereof of the glass frame 15, and a perspective view (c) and a partially enlarged view (d) of the glass frame 15 seen obliquely from below.
).

The viewing window portion 789 is located on the front frame base unit 480 of the glass frame 15 (or the upper tray unit 2
0 back plate 742 (FIG. 19) of the rear member 740 and the front portion 702 of the upper tray unit 20 (FIG. 1).
9) between the rear ends 702c. The viewing window portion 789 is positioned below the mounting portion 722 of the upper tray unit 20 (upper tray unit main body 680).

The viewing window portion 789 is for viewing the inside of the upper tray unit 20 attached to the glass frame 15 from the right side or the like when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12 . A transparent cover for protecting the inside of the upper tray unit 20 may be fitted in the viewing window portion 789 . When the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12 , the viewing window portion 789 is blocked by the right projecting portion 29 b ( FIG. 5 ) of the lower tray unit 29 .

Through the viewing window portion 789, the opening/closing lever 733 (FIG. 19) in the upper tray unit 20 and its operation can be viewed from the right side. The opening/closing lever 733 moves the opening/closing member 734 according to the operation of the upper tray operation portion 735 . When the opening/closing member 734 is opened, the game balls on the upper tray 21 flow down to the lower tray 23. - 特許庁Even if the opening/closing lever 733 is inside the upper tray unit 20, it can be visually observed through the viewing window portion 789 by outside light from the right lens member 681 and light leaking from the LED substrate 721, and the operation of the opening/closing member 734 can be confirmed. be able to.

Also, through the viewing window portion 789, the aforementioned LED substrate 721 (see FIG. 1) in the upper tray unit 20
9) and its light emitting operation can be visually recognized from the obliquely lower rear side. Note that the front surface portion 702 and the right lens member 681 of the upper tray unit 20 are located on the lower right side of the front frame base unit 480 at the curved recessed end portion 480c and on the right side of the back plate 742 of the upper tray unit 20. bulges outward from the curved indented end portion 742c located at . For this reason, the viewing window portion 789
The LED substrate 721 that irradiates the right lens member 681 with light can be seen through the lens.

[Protruding production unit (decoration device)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the protruding production units provided on both sides of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), that is, the decoration devices 18b and 18c will be described. Figure 33
12A is an exploded view (a) in which the decoration devices 18b and 18c are separated from the glass frame 15, and (b) is an exploded view of one protruding production unit (decoration device 18b). FIG. 34 is a front view of one projecting effect unit (decorative device 18b).

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the decoration devices 18b and 18c each include a front frame base unit 480.
are attached to attachment portions 790a and 790b on both sides in the left-right direction. decoration device 18
b, 18c are provided outside the vertical plates 482b, 482c of the front frame inner member 482, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the protruding production unit (decorative device 18b) includes an LED board 791, a back cover 792, a reflector 793, and an inner lens 79, which are superimposed and combined.
4, a side cover 795, and an outer lens 796.

The LED substrate 791 includes a plurality of (10) LEDs 791a in the left column and a plurality of (16) LEDs in the right column.
LED 791 b and is attached to the attachment portion 790 a on the right side of the front frame base unit 480 . A transparent back cover 792 is placed in front of the LED board 791 and fixed to the reflector 793 and the inner lens 794 . In addition, the back cover 792 is
A plurality of recesses 792a at the jagged left end correspond to a plurality of LEDs 791a in the left row. Therefore, the back cover 792 partially covers the plurality of LEDs 791b in the right column, but does not cover the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column. The reflector 793 is entirely made of metal or plated with metal to reflect light, and is attached to the back cover 792 . Reflector 793 is
It has a plurality of (10) openings 793a at positions facing the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column.

The inner lens 794 is fixed to the rear cover 792 and arranged so as to sandwich the reflector 793 together with the rear cover 792 . The left surface of inner lens 794 conforms to reflector 793 . The inner lens 794 is made of milky-white colored resin and slightly transmits light. An inner lens 794 and an outer lens 796 are attached to the side cover 795 at the same location. Also, the side cover 795 has a plurality of openings 795a as decoration. The transparent outer lens 796 is the inner lens 794
and engage reflector 793 . The outer lens 796 is the reflector 7
It has a plurality of engagement receiving portions 796a that engage with the plurality of engaging portions 793b of 93, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 34, the left LED 791a on the LED board 791 is connected to the reflector 79
3 opening 793 a , it is visible through a transparent outer lens 796 . The direct light from the left LED 791a and the reflected light (indirect light) reflected by the reflector 793 from the left LED 791a pass through the transparent outer lens 796 toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10. Since the light reaches the player, an effective lighting effect is possible. Also, since the back cover 792 does not cover the LEDs 791 a in the left row, the light from the LEDs 791 a can pass straight through the opening 793 a of the reflector 793 without being refracted by the back cover 792 .

On the other hand, the LEDs 791b in the right column on the LED board 791 are covered with an inner lens 794 (dotted line in FIG. 34) colored milky white and are not exposed and cannot be visually recognized. L in the right column
Since the ED 791b provides soft illumination to the outside of the game machine 10 through the inner lens 794, it has a lighting mode different from that of the left row LED 791a, enabling effective light emission production in addition to the production of the left row LED 791a.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 equipped with a display device (for example, the display device 41) capable of executing a predetermined effect includes operating means (the effect button unit 750, the operation panel 690, etc.) that can be operated by the player. , a flow means (for example, an outer peripheral groove 754c, a front guide port 766g, a lateral guide port 766i) that allows the fluid that flows around the operation means to flow inside the game machine, and a flow of the fluid that has flowed by the flow means delay means (for example, communication space S2 (storage unit 71
3), base portion surrounding portions 730e, 730f (storage portions 777a, 777b), bottom portion surrounding portion 7
30a, 730b (reservoirs 778a, 778b), communicating space S1, communicating spaces S3, S4
, S5, S6). The operating means may include a circuit board (eg, LED board 767, relay board 737), or may incorporate the circuit board, for example.

In the gaming machine 10 as described above, the flow means allows the fluid to flow inside the gaming machine, and the delay means delays the movement of the fluid flowed into the gaming machine by the flow means. slow down the flow. Therefore, when the player is playing the game, the fluid flows along the surface of the gaming machine 10 (the surface of the upper tray unit 20, etc.) to the side of the player, thereby distracting the player from the game. It is possible to reduce the situation in which interest is lost.

In addition, in such a game machine 10, fluids such as water do not enter the operation means (the effect button unit 750, etc.), so malfunction (failure) of the circuit board (electronic component) in the operation means caused by water leakage etc. To allow a player to continue his/her interest without the trouble of being unable to execute an operation presentation related to a game. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 as described above, a game area generated by discharging a fluid such as water to the outside of the gaming machine causes game balls soiled by contact with the fluid to enter the gaming machine (game area 32). Deterioration of members in 32 can also be prevented. Furthermore, according to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to reduce the trouble of cleaning fluids discharged from the gaming machine.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes shielding means (for example, the button frame 752) for shielding the player from fluids flowing around the operation means.

In the gaming machine 10 as described above, even if a fluid is dropped onto the operating means during the game of the player, the shielding means prevents the fluid from flowing around the operating means (the production button unit 750). is shielded from the player, the player will not be distracted by the fluid and lose interest.

In addition, according to the first embodiment, the delay means includes a storage portion that stores at least part of the fluid (for example, the communication space S2 (storage portion 713), the base portion surrounding portions 730e and 730f (storage portion 7
77a, 777b), bottom enclosing portions 730a, 730b (reservoirs 778a, 778b))
have

In the gaming machine 10 as described above, the delay means is provided with the storage section, so that at least a part of the fluid can be stored in the storage section. As a result, even when the volume of the fluid is large, the flow of the fluid can be greatly delayed, and the player will not be distracted by the fluid and lose interest.

Also, according to the first embodiment, the circuit board (for example, the LE in the effect button unit 750
The D board 767, the balance display portion 690a arranged on the operation panel 690, the ball lending button 690
and an electronic circuit board 697a for the return button 690c (see FIG. 25), and an electronic circuit board 697b for the volume control buttons 690d and 690e and the cross key 690f (see FIG. 25).
)) delay means (for example, reservoir 713, reservoirs 777a and 777b, reservoir 778
a, 778b).

In such a gaming machine 10, the fluid is the LED board 7 in the effect button unit 750.
67, and the electronic circuit board 697a (see FIG. 25) and electronic circuit board 697b (see FIG. 25) arranged on the operation panel 690. can be prevented from coming into contact with the fluid.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect button unit 750 is inclined forward downward so that the end on the player side is lower than the end on the board side. For this reason, the fluid dropped into the effect button unit 750 is caused to flow toward the player side (forward), and is quickly transferred to the flow means (front induction port 766g) connected to the delay means (communication spaces S1, S2). can be induced.

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave projecting portion forming the front guide port 766g in the button lower base 766. be done. Each of the ribs 776 is formed to extend in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 extends downward from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. It is formed to be taller. Therefore, the fluid easily flows along the ribs 776 and into the front guide port 766g.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the front portion of the effect button unit 750 in a state where each part of the upper tray unit 20 is assembled, the outside of the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754 and the button lower base 766 A front guide port 766 formed in an annular portion 766b of
The fluid flows into the communication space S1 formed between the outside of g and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield both. After that, the outer side of the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 located in the front portion of the upper plate frame 700 in which the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (the button unit base 770) are accommodated, and the central sharp portion 69 of the operation panel 690
The fluid flows into the communication space S2 formed between the inside of 6a.

The communication spaces S1 and S2 are inside the gaming machine and are isolated from the outside. The user will not be distracted by the fluid and lose interest.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lower part 710 that constitutes the first storage part 713
, bottom surfaces 710a and 710b are formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side. Therefore, it is easy to store the fluid under the lower portion 710 . Also, the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690
When the central sharp portion 696a of is transparent, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower portion 710 are visible to the player. In this case, the bottom surface 7 of the lower part 710 that is visible to the player
10a and 710b are a right lens base 706 extending in the right direction of the upper tray frame 700;
The design continues with the left lens base 707 extending leftward. For this reason, it has a structure that does not impair the appearance of the game machine while having the function of storing the fluid.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the width of the upper part 712 in the horizontal direction (the partition part 7
12c and the partition portion 712d) is narrower than the width of the widest portion of the V-shaped lower step portion 710 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the fluid that has flowed down from the upper stage portion 712 can be caused to flow into the widened lower stage portion 710 quickly.

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the side notch 754f formed in the left-right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide opening 766i of the button lower base 766 are arranged so as to positionally correspond to each other. is formed in As a result, the fluid can flow not only in the front direction of the effect button unit 750 but also in the lateral direction (horizontal direction).

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment, on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the outside of the side notch 754f of the button lens main body 754a and the lateral guide port 766i of the button lower base 766, and the inside of the button frame 752 and a communication space S3 formed between. Also, the radially outer side of the button lower base 766 and the panel-side concave portion 6 of the operation panel 690
94b to connect between the radially outer side of the button unit base 770 and the right reinforcing plate 739a. It also has a base surrounding portion 730e to which the communication space S4 is connected.

The communication spaces S3 and S4 and the platform surrounding portion 730e are areas shielded from the player and are cut off from the outside, so that fluids do not flow out of the middle of the communication spaces S3 and S4. Therefore, the player will not be distracted by the fluids and lose interest during the game.

In addition, in such a gaming machine 10, when the capacity of the fluid exceeds the capacity of the base portion surrounding portion 730e, it can be made to flow into the bottom portion surrounding portion 730a. Therefore, even if the volume of the fluid is large, the fluid does not flow out of the gaming machine or the outflow is delayed. does not reduce

Further, the base portion 730c formed with the base portion surrounding portion 730e described above is a structure for providing the right reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and is a portion that is less likely to be damaged or deteriorated due to water leakage. Also, the bottom enclosing portion 730 e is configured to support the button unit base 770 . By providing such a position with a function of accumulating the fluid, even if the fluid is retained inside the game machine 10, it may contaminate the game ball, touch the circuit board of the game machine, or cause damage to the members in the game area. You can avoid problems such as deterioration of

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as described above, the flow means allows the fluid to flow inside the gaming machine, and the delay means allows the fluid to flow inside the gaming machine by the flowing means. Delay the flow of fluids. As a result, in the game machine 10, the speed at which the fluid flows into the inside of the game machine (the inside of the upper tray unit 20) is slowed down, so that the fluid such as water may flow into the circuit board (for example, the LED board 767 and the relay board 737). before getting to the important parts such as
Fluids can be evaporated or dispersed. Therefore, it is possible to protect important parts inside the game machine from fluids, and to prevent the loss of interest of the player due to the failure of the game machine or the like.

Note that the above-described effects are similarly produced on the left side of the upper tray unit 20 (the production button unit 750).

[Second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 50. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first example, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Game board]
The game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. Figure 35 shows
FIG. 11 is a front view (normal game state) of the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment; FIG. 36 is a front view of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (indicating a specific mode).
FIG. 37 is a front view (specific game state) of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the a.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window portion that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. In addition, behind the window of the center case 40 and in front of the display device 41, a movable accessory 820, a falling accessory 810, etc. are arranged around the display device 41 when viewed from the front.

The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 has a plurality of variable display areas (variable display areas 610,
615) are provided, and identification information (special symbols) and a character (for example, a character 826a (FIG. 40)) for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. others,
The display screen displays images (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game.

For example, in the central part of the display device 41, as identification information, a variation of a decorative special pattern (large pattern) (
↓↓↓) is displayed. On the right side of the display device 41, from the top, the 4th pattern 671 of the special figure 1, the 4th pattern 672 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660,
Special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 and variation display area 615 are displayed.

The fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 indicates whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. not pending or suspended). In addition, the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 indicates whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. Indicates that it is in progress (not pending).

The special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 displays the number of reservations of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game described later (the maximum number of reservations is 4
) is displayed. Special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 displays the number of reservations (maximum number of reservations is 4) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game described later. The variable display area 615 displays the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) as identification information.

At the bottom of the display device 41, a suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game described later (first start memory) or a suspension of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game described later (second start memory) is displayed as a reservation display 633 A display section 630a and a pending digestion area 640 displaying a variable pending display 633a indicating pending related to the variable display game being executed (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game) are displayed. In addition, the reservation display 633 and the variable reservation display 633a are changed in color,
It is possible to display a notice effect by changing the shape, pattern, etc.

In addition, a mode display portion 674 (first suggestive information) for displaying the production mode (stage) by character information is displayed on the upper left portion of the display device 41 . As the display of the production mode, arbitrary words are applied according to the game state. ), in a specific game state such as a time-saving state, it is displayed as "??? mode" (Fig. 36), and in a special game state (big win, small win), it is displayed as "tiger mode" (Fig. 37).

By operating the effect operation device (the above-mentioned effect button 25) by the player, the effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure fluctuation display game etc. displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2) is performed. It can be carried out. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device (effect button 25) during non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, a winning device or the like having a specific area 86 is provided, and the specific area 8
A variable probability state is generated when a game ball passes through 6. If a specific kind of jackpot (probability variable jackpot or the like) is won by the jackpot pattern random number, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time, the game balls surely pass through, and after the jackpot is finished, the state can shift to the probability variable state. In addition, in this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the variable probability state (high probability state) continues until the next big hit occurs.

The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device 530 into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

A return valve 814 and a valve sensor 81 are provided at the entrance of the game area 32 (the exit of the shot ball guide passage 33).
4a is placed. The return valve 814 is arranged so as to be rotatable with its lower end being fixed and its upper end being free.
(not shown) is attached.

The return valve 814 returns to the game area 3 by contacting the game ball shot from the ball shooting device 530 .
2 is rotated in a direction to open the entrance, and a game ball is introduced into the game area 32. - 特許庁After that, the return valve 81
4, when the game ball is separated from the return valve 814, it rotates in the opposite direction due to the biasing force, and the game area 32
It is designed to block the entrance of This prevents the game ball introduced into the game area 32 from returning to the ball launching device side.

The valve sensor 814a sends a detection signal to the game control device 100 each time the return valve 814 rotates in the direction of opening the entrance of the game area 32 (or every time it rotates in the direction of closing the entrance of the game area 32).
Send to The detection signal is used to count the number of shot balls (or the number of out balls). In addition, you may transmit the said detection signal to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 (after-mentioned), and may use it for production|presentation control.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided.

At a position below the stage portion 40b in the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides the conditions for starting the special figure variation display game. is provided. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize-winning opening 36.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the start winning port 36, special figure 1
The variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, it is treated as pending (the maximum number of pending is 4). In addition, directly below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30b for recovering game balls that have not won the winning opening is provided.

In the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, a general winning opening unit 808 having a plurality of general winning openings 35 and a collective display device 50 is arranged. In addition, the general prize winning unit 808 is also provided with an out port 30b. Here, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is achieved by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 79).
detected by In addition, the seal 81 that decorates the general prize winning unit 808
5 is attached. Seal 815 will be described later.

The collective display device 50 (see FIG. 39(b)) is a display device composed of 32 LED lamps in total, with eight horizontally arranged LED lamps arranged vertically in four stages. The collective display device 50 includes, for example, a first special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator 51) configured by eight LED lamps at the top and displaying the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second stage from the top 2nd special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 indicator 5
2) and

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a variation display unit (normal figure display device 53) that is configured by the fifth to seventh LED lamps from the left on the bottom stage and displays the normal figure variation display game, and the second row from the bottom. Composed of the first and second LED lamps from the left of the special figure 1 variable display game start (
Suspended) Consisting of a special figure 1 suspension display unit 54 that notifies the number of memories, and the third and fourth LED lamps from the left in the second row from the bottom, the special figure 2 variable display Informs the number of starting (reserved) memories of the game It has a special figure 2 reservation display unit 55 to do.

Furthermore, the collective display device 50 is composed of the seventh LED lamp from the left on the second row from the bottom, and informs that it is right-handed (should be right-handed) or left-handed (normally). 1
A second game state display unit composed of a game state display unit 57 (first game state display unit) and the rightmost LED lamp in the second row from the bottom, and lights up when the time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. 58 (second game state display) and an LED lamp arranged on the rightmost side of the lowest stage for displaying that the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state when the game machine 10 is powered on. 3 game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) and 1 from the left at the bottom
It has a round display section 60 which is composed of 4th to 4th LED lamps and displays the number of rounds (the number of times of opening and closing the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the upper limit of the number of rounds) at the time of the big win.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator instead of being configured by an assembly of a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, when executing variable display, all LED lamps are all lit and all extinguished (all LE
Simultaneous blinking of D), cyclic lighting (lighting from any one LED lamp in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals and then turning off), or lighting and extinguishing by a predetermined number of LED lamps out of a plurality of LED lamps (blinking ) or cyclic lighting.

Also in the normal map display device 53, the variable display game includes all LEs that make up the normal map display device 53
It is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the D lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general figure indicator 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52.

The lamp display device 80 arranged in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 has a pattern (
Lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) that perform variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as the fourth special symbol described later), and start (hold) memory number notification of each special figure variable display game It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED). Note that the lamp display device 80 is the effect control device 3
00 (described later).

Lamp display section 1 (top LED) and lamp display section 2 (second LED from the top) blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display unit 3 (3rd special figure 1 reserved LED1 from the top), lamp display unit 4 (4th special figure 1 reserved LED2 from the top) is a special figure 1
Display the number of pending (first starting memory number). Similarly, the lamp display unit 5 (the fifth special figure 2 from the top
Suspension LED1), lamp display unit 6 (lowest special figure 2 suspension LED2) displays the special figure 2 suspension number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the pending number due to the occurrence of the big hit, but if it is not in the big hit state (
(Including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41) displays the number of reservations.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a channel unit 802, a large winning opening unit 800, a general electric unit 804, and a large winning opening unit 806 are provided in this order from the top.

The flow path unit 802 forms a flow path including the normal pattern starting gate 34, and regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the game ball flows down to the big winning opening unit 800. . Here, inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

The special winning opening unit 800 is a combination of the general winning opening 35, the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening solenoid 39b, open/close door 39c (blade member 914a in FIG. 72)), specific area 86, and the like. . In the big winning opening unit 800 , the game ball flowing down from the channel unit 802 enters the general winning opening 35 or flows down the channel leading to the special variable winning device 39 . Here, the special variable winning device 39 is normally closed, and the game ball flowing down the channel is made to flow down to the general electric unit 804 . However, when the result mode of the above special figure 1 variation display game becomes a special game state (big hit), or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game described later becomes a special game state (big hit, small win), a predetermined The game ball is opened for a certain period of time so that the game ball can win a prize in the special variable winning device 39, and furthermore, it has a configuration in which it can win a prize in the specific area 86 with a predetermined probability. The details of the big winning slot unit 800 will be described in the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 (V switch, FIG. 72)) or the like, and when the V winning is detected, the jackpot ends. While confirming that it moves to the variable probability state later, the effect control device 300 described later
to send information (specified area passing command, etc.) indicating that there was a V prize. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

The general electric unit 804 forms a flow path that includes the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning region), and the game balls that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 Drain to unit 806 . Here, the normal variable prize winning device 37 opens the movable member 37b for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) to allow the game ball to win when the result of the above normal pattern variable display game is a hit. Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure 2
The variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, it is treated as pending (the maximum number of pending is 4).

The special winning opening unit 806 forms a flow path including the special variable winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening solenoid 38b, sliding door 38c). is made to flow down to the out port 30b located directly below the start winning port 36. - 特許庁Here, the special variable winning device 38 is normally closed and the game ball does not win. However, when the result mode of the above special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes a special game state (big hit) (or when the result mode of the above special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a special game state (big hit, small hit)), a predetermined The time is released and the game ball becomes a state in which the special variable prize winning device 38 can win a prize.

The RUSH lamp 812 (second lighting means) is arranged above the big winning opening unit 806 and on the left side of the general electric unit 804 . As the RUSH lamp 812, for example, a lamp capable of full-color lighting is applied. In addition, the RUSH lamp 812 is the effect control device 30
0, and the lighting state (including color change) changes based on the game state. In particular, R
The USH lamp 812 lights (blinks) so that the letters "RUSH", for example, float when a variable probability state (a state in which a small hit rush (small hit RUSH) can occur) occurs (FIG. 37). Here, the characters “↓RUSH↓” (or “RUSH”) of the RUSH lamp 812 may be printed on the surface of the RUSH lamp 812 . Also, the RUSH lamp 812
A plurality of light emitters (
LED, etc.). By displaying "↓" next to "RUSH", it is possible to draw attention to the big winning opening unit 806 in which the small winning rush is occurring.

The movable accessory 820 has an arcuate shape as a whole and includes an accessory lamp 820a (first light emitting means), and is an accessory that is controlled and moved by the effect control device 300 according to the game state. In the initial state (normal game state), the movable accessory 820 is arranged at a position covering the left side of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 35, for example. At this time, the character lamp 82
0a is arranged on the back side of the warp passage 40e, and has a lighting mode that decorates the warp passage 40e from the back side.

36 and 37, the movable accessory 820 has an upper guide member 954 (FIG. 41) arranged on the left side of the movable accessory 820 and a lower guide member 9 arranged below the movable accessory 820.
Sliding along 56 (Fig. 41) moves in an arc. Movable accessory 820
The structure of is described later.

As described above, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged on the back side of the warp passage 40e when arranged as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the role product lamp 820a moves as the movable role product 820 moves. For example, when the movable accessory 820 moves to the intermediate position as shown in FIG. 36, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at the bottom of the display device 41 and used to display an effect using the effect button 25 as described later. Also, for example, when the movable role object 820 moves to the final position as shown in FIG. It is used to display the result of (loss, small hit or big hit). Namely, the role lamp 82
0a moves its position according to the game state, and uses different lighting modes to perform effects with different purposes. In addition, since the RUSH lamp 812 is lit when the role object lamp 820a (movable role object 820) is arranged as shown in FIG.
Not only the lighting of 2 but also the position of the role product lamp 820a (movable role product 820) can suggest a probability changing state.

The falling accessory 810 is an accessory having a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction in the initial state, and its right side portion is pivotally supported so that it can be rotated by a motor and a gear. Therefore, the falling accessory 810 can be rotated by driving the motor with the right side as the fixed end and the left side as the free end. When the motor is driven in the opposite direction, it can rotate in the opposite direction and return to the initial state. The motor is controlled by the effect control device 300. FIG. In addition, an opening 810a
is formed, and various decorations (see FIG. 40) can be attached to the opening 810a.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the game machine 10, a game is played by shooting a game ball from the ball shooting device 530 toward the game area 32 through the shot ball guide passage 33. - 特許庁The launched game ball is moved in the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc.
flow down, normal figure starting gate 34, general winning mouth 35, starting winning mouth 36, normal variable winning device 3
7 or special variable winning devices 38 and 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning port is sent to the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 through.

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 79), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 79) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 79). A game ball that has won a prize in a starting prize winning port 36 is detected as a prize winning ball in a special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball that has won a prize in a normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is a special figure 2. It is detected as the starting winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for each predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display unit 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display unit 55 for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory, the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 indicator 52
Run the floating display game.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be set to a running state at the same time (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game does not have a small hit in this embodiment), the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result. do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result.

When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, and the special figure 1
Derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number) is postponed, and after the small hit operation regarding the special figure 2 variable display game is completed, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be resumed. .

In addition, when the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting to the right in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to vary, but basically it varies for a long time (long variation, for example, 10 minutes). is performed, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this time, it will be forcibly lost and stopped.

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbols), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest. moreover,
In the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, as other decorative special symbols (identification information), the lamp display device 8
In the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of 0, the fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) fluctuates due to repetition (blinking) of lighting display and non-lighting display. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit. In addition, in the display device 41, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is displayed as the fourth symbol 671 of the first special symbol and the fourth symbol 672 of the second special symbol.

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. Also, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game may simultaneously take a running state (running state).

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the jackpot state (
special game state). In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig. 7).
9), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the special variable winning device 38, 39 is provided with a large winning opening that opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win a large number of game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), the result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern as a small hit state. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 39
b. By energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 79), the large winning opening is changed from closed to open for a predetermined short period of time. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state.

In this embodiment, only the special variable winning device 38 is activated and only the lower big winning opening is opened in the small winning state, but both the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are activated in the small winning state. It may be configured such that both the lower special winning opening and the upper special winning opening are opened by operation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable probability state, it becomes a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit frequently occurs due to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In the small winning rush, the special variable winning device 38 is opened with high frequency. In addition, even in the time saving state, the small hit RU
An SH (rush) state configuration is also possible.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. note that,"
The condition device may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened by setting a big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, a special prize is set by setting a small hit flag. Variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened.

After the end of the big win state, if there is a V prize during the big win state, the state shifts to the probability variable state, and if there is no V prize, the state shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, after the end of the small win state (for a short time compared to the big win state), the game returns to the original game state before the start of the small win state. The probability of a big win is low during the state of a big win, but during the state of a small win, the probability of a big win before the start of the state of a small win is maintained (the probability state does not change in the state of a small win). Therefore, the small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently continues from the start of the variable probability state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit result), and the probability of big hits throughout the small hit rush state. is maintained at a high probability (probability fluctuation state).

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, starter 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a, FIG. 79) in normal variable winning device 37, specific area The switch 72 (V switch, FIGS. 72 and 79) is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used (FIG. 79). In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used (Fig. 7
9).

Details of the game control for the game (variable display game, etc.), the effect control for the effect, and the game control device 100 for executing the game control and the effect control device 300 for executing the effect control are based on the block diagram and the flowchart. will be described later in the fifth embodiment.

[Arrangement of role lamps, lighting mode of role lamps and RUSH lamps]
As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in this embodiment, the mode display portion 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the big prize winning unit 806 displayed on the display device 41 are arranged substantially diagonally (from the upper left to the lower right) of the game board 30. are arranged so as to line up on an imaginary line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) that forms a line toward which they face. In particular, in the special variable winning device 38, the sliding door 38c for opening and closing the big winning opening is arranged on the virtual line 822 (FIG. 37). It should be noted that the return valve 814 is arranged so that at least its tip overlaps the imaginary line 822 by rotating.

Accessory lamp 820a is normal game state (FIG. 35) and specific game state (excluding variable probability state)
( FIG. 36 ) is arranged at a position spaced apart from the virtual line 822 . At this time, the RUSH lamp 812 is basically off. In addition, in the normal game state and the specific game state (except for the variable probability state), the role product lamp 820a may be turned on for effect as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, the role item lamp 820a is the effect control device 3 in the normal game state.
The warp path 40e is decorated by lighting based on the control of 00, but when a game ball wins in the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, for example, a variable display game, which will be described later, is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 36, when a specific game state (excluding the variable probability state) such as a time saving state occurs, a mode display section 674 of "? mode" is displayed in the upper left part of the display device 41, and a movable accessory is displayed. 820 is moved to the middle position so that the accessory lamp 820a is placed at a position substantially in the center of the lower portion of the display device 41 . Also, the character lamp 820a and the display device 41 are used for production by the production control device 300. FIG.

For example, in the central part of the display device 41, there is a display "Turn off by operating the button" and the characters "PUSH" displayed below it are surrounded by an ellipse. Information 618a is displayed. At this time, the role product lamp 820a is arranged at a position directly below the operation prompting information 618a, and all the LED lamps (seven pieces) constituting the role product lamp 820a are turned on as an initial state. Further, remaining number information 618b indicating the remaining number of LED lamps to be extinguished is displayed at a position between the operation promotion information 618a and the character lamp 820a on the display device 41, such as "seven more".

Each time the player presses the effect button 25 in the above state, the LED lamps constituting the role item lamp 820a are turned off one by one, and the remaining number indicated by the remaining number information 618b is reduced by one. . When all the LED lamps are extinguished, the display device 41 and the character lamp 820
a, an upper effect unit 40c, a side effect unit 40d, an arbitrary effect using the falling accessories 810, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 37, when the variable probability state (state in which a small hit rush can occur) is reached, the role lamps 820a are arranged so as to line up on the virtual line 822. As shown in FIG. At this time, the RUSH lamp 81
2 emits light (suggestive light) to suggest that it is in a probability variable state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur). At this time, the role lamp 820a (movable role 820) suggests a variable probability state depending on its operating position, but the variable probability state (a state where a small hit rush can occur) is caused by the same light emission mode as the RUSH lamp 812. may suggest.

Also, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, a variable display game using the character lamp 820a is started (FIG. 38). When the result of the variable display game is a small win, the character lamp 820a is stopped and displayed, but the RUSH lamp 812 blinks during the small win state, for example. Also, when a big win is achieved, the role lamp 820a is stopped and displayed, and for example, the RUSH lamp 812 emits light in a different color during the big win state than in the variable probability state. The RUSH lamp 812, for example, emits light in blue in the variable probability state, emits light in yellow in the jackpot state, or emits red,
It emits light in 7 colors (rainbow colors) of orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet in order.

In addition, the RUSH lamp 812 and the role lamp 820a may be lit all the time (either the same emission color, the same (similar) emission color, or a completely different emission color) as long as the variable state is maintained. Then, it may be flashed at predetermined time intervals (for example, the timing at which the production control device 300 receives the detection signal transmitted from the valve sensor 814a), and the light emission color may be changed.

In the variable probability state, at least the role lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the large winning unit 806 are aligned on the virtual line 822, and the player can enter the large winning unit 806 that can win a small win (or a big win). The line of sight is easier to turn.

At this time, in the display device 41, the RUS
Suggestive light emission relating to the probability changing state of the H lamp 812 and the character object lamp 820a is displayed on the virtual line 822 . As a result, the player can see the mode display section 674, the role lamp 820a, the RUSH
The existence of the virtual line 822 is recognized by the lamp 812 , and the line of sight is easily turned to the large winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822 .

Furthermore, when the small winning state is reached and the big winning opening 38 is opened, the effect image 617 (specific image) is displayed on the virtual line 822 . The effect image 617 is, for example, the virtual line 82
2 A video (still image is also acceptable) that shows the movement of sparks violently scattering in the direction along the top is applied,
For example, it is displayed in conjunction with the opening time of the big winning opening 38 . As a result, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 from the mode display section 674, the effect image 617, the character lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812, and the player's line of sight is directed toward the big winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822. It becomes easier to turn.

Further, on the display device 41 , an arrow image 619 (second suggestive information) indicating the direction in which the big winning opening unit 806 is arranged is displayed on the virtual line 822 in conjunction with the display of the effect image 617 . The arrow image 619 may be a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image moving along the virtual line 822 toward the big winning opening unit 806 . As a result, the player's line of sight can be reliably directed to the big winning opening unit 806 .

Also, the RUSH lamp 812 may be arranged on the opposite side of the role product lamp 820a with the big winning opening unit 806 interposed therebetween. That is, the RUSH lamp 812
Placed on the lower right imaginary line 822, the large winning opening unit 806 is placed on the character lamp 820a
and the RUSH lamp 812 . As a result, the character lamp 820
a and the RUSH lamp 812 are turned on, the large winning opening unit 806 sandwiched between them
can draw attention to. Also, the large winning opening unit 806 and the RUSH lamp 812 may be integrated, so that when the RUSH lamp 812 lights up, attention can be drawn to the large winning opening unit 806 .

[Variable display mode of role lamp]
38A and 38B are schematic diagrams showing the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 820a. FIG. 38A shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion rotates during fluctuation, and FIG. FIG. 38(c) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting part changes like drawing a figure of eight when it fluctuates, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 38, the accessory lamp 820a is an LED lamp 823a arranged in the center.
and a plurality of (six in this embodiment) LED lamps 823b arranged around the LED lamp 823a. The LED lamps 823a and 823b are preferably capable of full-color lighting.

As a display pattern of the variable display game, for example, as shown in FIG. The LED lamps 823b adjacent to each other (counterclockwise) light up, and by repeating this, display is performed by cyclic lighting in which the lighting circulates around the LED lamps 823a. At this time, the number of times of circulation may be one or more. Then, when the result mode of the variable display game is a loss (a small hit is acceptable), only the LED lamp 823a lights up and L
All the ED lamps 823b are extinguished. On the other hand, when the result mode of the variable display game is a small win (or a loss), the LED lamp 823a is turned off and all the LED lamps 823b are turned on. Furthermore, when the result mode of the variable display game is a big hit, the LED lamps 823a and 823b are all lit or all blinking in synchronism.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the variable display game may be displayed by alternately lighting the LED lamps 823a and 823b. The results are shown in Fig. 3
8(a). Then, when the next variable display game is to be played, the LED lamps 823a and 823b may all be turned off for a predetermined short time so that the start and end of the variable display game can be made clear.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 38(c), a variable display game may be displayed by cyclic lighting in which the lighting positions are moved horizontally so as to draw a figure of eight with the LED lamp 823a at the center. The result mode is the same as in the case of FIG. 38(a).

Full-color LEDs can be applied to the LED lamps 823a and 823b.
Instead of turning off the light, a lighting mode may be adopted in which a specific emission color circulates while all of the LED lamps 823a and 823b are turned on. For example, one LED lamp is lit with a yellow emission color, all the remaining LED lamps are lit with a blue emission color, and the LED lamps 823a and 823b are switched so that the yellow lighting moves to the adjacent LED. It is good also as a lighting mode which cyclically lights in between.

In the case of the above alternate lighting, the LED lamp 823a and the LED
A lighting mode in which the lamp 823b emits light alternately may be employed. For example, the LED lamp 823
A lighting mode may alternately switch between a state in which the LED lamps 823b are lit in blue and a state in which all of the LED lamps 823b are lit in yellow.

Furthermore, the result mode is also a state in which all the LED lamps 823a and 823b are lit.
23b lights up in a luminescent color other than the specific luminescent color, and if it is a small hit, the LED lamp 823b
is lit in a specific luminescent color and the LED lamp 823a is lit in a luminescent color other than the specific luminescent color. For example, in the case of misalignment, the LED lamp 823a lights in a yellow emission color and the LED lamp 823b lights in a blue emission color, and in the case of a small hit, LE
A lighting mode may be adopted in which the D lamp 823a is lit in a blue emission color and the LED lamp 823b is lit in a yellow emission color.

In addition, the variable display game may be performed not only in the probability variable state shown in FIG. 37, but also in the normal game state shown in FIG. 35 and the time saving state (specific mode state) shown in FIG. The execution time (fluctuation time) of the display game is set shorter than the execution time in the normal game state. As a result, for example, when a small winning rush is occurring, the variation display game is quickly performed to enhance the feeling of rush, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The execution time (shortest variation time, longest variation time, average variation time) is, for example, (1.2 seconds, 2 seconds, 1.6 seconds) in the normal game state, (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 0.7
5 seconds), and (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 0.75 seconds) in the variable probability state (small hit rush state). The longest fluctuation time in the normal game state is the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (described later)
, for example, 10 minutes. Also, in the case of reach, the maximum fluctuation time may be increased to several tens of seconds.

[Seal that decorates the general winning entrance unit]
FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram of the general prize winning unit 808 and the collective display device 50, and FIG.
39(b) is a detailed view of the collective display device 50, FIG. 39(c) is a schematic diagram of a sticker 815 decorating the general prize winning unit 808, and FIG.
19a, 819b and related information 817 are shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 39( a ), the general winning slot unit 808 (unit) includes a plurality of general winning slots 35 (winning slots), an out slot 30 b, and a collective display device 50 , and the lower left corner of the game area 32 . position (left of the start winning opening 36). In this embodiment, the unit incorporates the general winning opening 35, but the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, etc. may be incorporated.

In addition, the general prize winning port unit 808 has a front wall 808a covering the general prize winning port 35 and the out port 30b, and a lower portion following the boundary of the game area 32. As shown in FIG.

The front wall 808a may be transparent or opaque. If the front wall 808a is opaque, the portion overlapping the collective display device 50 is made transparent so that the collective display device 50 can be visually recognized. Also, a seal 815 (decorative portion) for decorating the general prize winning unit 808 is attached to the front wall 808a.

As shown in FIG. 39(c), the seal 815 has an outer shape that follows the shape of the front wall 808a. The seal 815 may be transparent or opaque. If the seal 815 is opaque, a transparent portion 815 a (or an opening portion) is provided at a position overlapping the collective display device 50 . Even if the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to provide an opening in a portion overlapping with the collective display device 50 . As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the collective display device 50 becomes difficult to see due to reflection of light on the surface of the seal 815 . Also, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the collective display device 50 .

Position information 819a and 819b (general prize winning opening position information) indicating the position of the general prize winning opening 35 and position information 818a (out exit position information) indicating the position of the out exit 30b are displayed on the sticker 815. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 39(d), the position information 819a and 819b has, for example, a rectangular frame and characters "IN" arranged therein. This indicates that it is the winning opening 35 . The position information 818a also has, for example, a rectangular frame and characters "OUT" arranged therein, indicating that the position where the characters "OUT" are arranged is the outlet 30b. The areas within the frames of the position information 818a, 819a, 819b may be transparent or opaque, except for the characters.

On the seal 815, related information 817 (round information) listing the display modes of the number of rounds of the big win displayed by the round display unit 60 (duration time of the big win, upper limit of the number of rounds) is displayed. Related information 817 is a rectangular frame from the left with 16 rounds (variable probability), 16 rounds (
Normal), 8 rounds, and 2 rounds of lighting modes are displayed in a horizontal row.

Correspondingly, as shown in FIG. 39(b), emphasis information for emphasizing (suggesting) that the round display portion 60 is provided at a position corresponding to the round display portion 60 in the transparent portion 815a of the seal 815. 815b is displayed. The emphasized information 815b may have a rectangular frame shape surrounding the round display portion 60 as shown in FIG. Further, the sticker 815 includes emphasized information 815b
and the related information 817 are displayed, and the emphasized information 815b and the related information 817 are displayed.
This suggests that the Therefore, the player can clearly determine which round the current round is by comparing the lighting information displayed within the frame of the emphasized information 815b and the related information 817. FIG.

Moreover, the seal 815 has patterns 816a, 816b, and 81 for decorating the entire seal 815.
6c is displayed. The patterns 816a, 816b, and 816c have, for example, a star-shaped frame shape. Each pattern can be arbitrarily displayed as long as the visibility of the collective display device 50 and related information 817 can be ensured. For example, a pattern 816 a that overlaps the related information 817 is displayed in such a manner that a portion of the pattern 816 a is covered with the reference information 817 . The pattern 816a overlapping the transparent portion 815a is displayed so that the portion overlapping the transparent portion 815a (collective display device 50) disappears. The pattern 816b is displayed on the position information 818a at a position that does not overlap the characters "OUT". The pattern 816c is on the position information 819a, 819b and is "
"IN" is displayed at the position where the characters are arranged inside.

The sticker 815 of this embodiment displays the winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, so that the player can pay attention to it. Also, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the content of the special game state can be easily understood.

In addition, the seal 815 of this embodiment is the seal 81 that decorates the general prize winning unit 808.
5, related information 817 suggesting the lighting mode of the round display portion 60 is displayed. As a result, by applying the sticker 815 reflecting the relevant information 817 to other models having different relevant information 817, the general prize winning unit 808 can be applied to other models.
The versatility of the general prize winning port unit 808 can be enhanced.

By the way, since the general prize winning unit 808 is arranged in the game area 32, when the model changes (the specifications and the motif of the model change), it is necessary to change the sticker that decorates the general prize winning unit 808. It is essential to change to a sticker that matches the object and board design. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the seal 8 that decorates the general prize winning unit 808
15, the lighting mode of the number of rounds of the collective display device 50 is displayed as the related information 817 . Thus, by changing the seal 815, both the display of the number of rounds and the decoration matching the motif (patterns 816a, 816b, and 816c are decorations other than the star (☆)) can be changed together, and as a result, , the structure of the general prize winning port unit 808 can be left as it is and can be reused only by changing the seal 815, and the cost can be reduced. Note that the collective display device 50 may not be mounted on the general prize winning unit 808, and even in this case, by displaying the related information 817 on the sticker 815, the player can be made to look at the sticker 815. .

More specifically, for example, (1) when using a model with the same motif but different specs (the number of rounds is small, for example, there are only two), the same batch display device 5 can be used as it is.
0. Use a general winning mouth unit 808: In this case, since there is no need for four LED lamps that indicate the number of rounds, for example, a seal (not shown, such as You may reuse it by sticking a black sticker from above. As a result, the general prize winning port unit 808 can be used in common, leading to cost reduction. Also, the two LED lamps may be made to emit light only when the power is turned on as invisible (difficult to see), and may function as LED lamps for confirming whether or not electricity is supplied. At this time, the LED lamps, which have become difficult to see due to the seal (not shown), are made so that at least red light emission can be seen to some extent.

In addition, for example, when the two LED lamps are hidden as in (2) and (1), a black sticker is also placed on the emphasis information 815b (for example, when the shape is a rectangular frame (□)) that emphasizes the number of rounds. (not shown) is pasted so that it can be seen that the LED lamps to be emphasized are the two LED lamps on the right. It becomes possible to emphasize the remaining right half without highlighting.

[Arrangement of movable accessories and falling accessories in each mode]
40A and 40B are diagrams for explaining the operation of the accessory unit and the falling accessory unit, the display mode on the display device, etc. FIG. -2)
is an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40(a-1), and FIG. 40(b
-1) is an example when suggesting a specific mode, and FIG. 40(b-2) is FIG.
), FIG. 40(c-1) shows an example of the variable probability state, and FIG. 40(c-2) shows FIG. 40(c-1). An example of the case where the falling accessory unit operates in the state is shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 40(a-1), in the normal game state (initial state), the movable accessory 820
is arranged to cover the left side of the display device 41 as an initial position, the falling accessory 810 is arranged to cover a part of the upper side of the display device 41, and "normal mode" is placed at the upper left position of the display device 41.
A mode display portion 674 consisting of characters is displayed. Also, for example, there is no reservation in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the fourth pattern 671 of the special figure 1 and the fourth pattern 672 of the special figure 2 are displayed as "x" (variation display game not executed), Figure 2 pending number display unit 660 and special figure 2 pending number display unit 66
0 is “0”, and the stop symbol “123” is displayed in the variable display area 615 . It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the mode display section 674 not to be displayed in the normal game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (a-2), for example, when the variation display game of special figure 1 (variation display area 610 is omitted) is started, the fourth symbol 671 of special figure 1 is "○" (special 1) is displayed, the fourth symbol 672 of special figure 2 is displayed as "x" (variation display game of special figure 2 is not executed), and special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 is displayed as "1 ” is displayed, the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 is displayed as “0”, and the identification information is variably displayed in the variable display area 615 .

At this time, with the execution of the variable display game (or with the occurrence of the reach), the falling accessory 81
0 falls (rotates at a predetermined angle). However, the falling accessory 810 does not interfere (collide) with the movable accessory 820 . Also, the falling accessory 810 is a character 826 displayed on the display device 41.
cover a. However, an opening 810a is formed in the falling accessory 810, and the character 826a can be visually recognized through the opening 810a. For example, when the result of the variable display game is lost, the falling accessory 810 returns to its initial position.

As shown in FIG. 40(b-1), when the mode display unit 674 is in a specific game state such as a time saving state so as to display the words "??
The movable accessory 820 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position so that it is arranged in front of the lower center of the . When the movable accessory 820 moves in this way, the movable accessory 820 interferes with the falling accessory 810 (
collision). Further, in the upper center of the display device 41, a specific display 826b composed of, for example, the word "heat" is displayed for the purpose of raising attention to the "? mode". again,
Lens 810b (convex lens or Fresnel lens) in opening 810a of falling object 810
is embedded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40(b-2), the falling accessory 810 falls in the same manner as described above. At this time, the lens 810b overlaps the specific display 826b and magnifies the characters "heat". For example, when the specific game state ends, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 return to their initial positions. The operation prompting information 618a (FIG. 36) can also be applied instead of the specific display 826b, and the lens 810b may enlarge and display the operation prompting information 618a to prompt the button operation.

As shown in FIG. 40 (c-1), in the case of the variable probability state, the mode display unit 674 displays the words "tiger mode", the RUSH lamp 812 lights up, and the right hand that instructs "right hitting" is displayed. A hitting instruction display 620 is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 . Also, the movable accessory 820 is moved from the intermediate position (or the initial position) to the final position so that the accessory lamp 820a is positioned at the lower right side of the display device 41 and adjacent to the RUSH lamp 812. there is The final position may be the maximum position to which the movable accessory 820 can move farthest from the initial position. In this way, when the movable accessory 820 is moved, the movable accessory 820 moves to the falling accessory 810.
There is no interference (collision) with Also, at the final position of the movable accessory 820, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged on the virtual line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) along which the mode display section 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the big winning opening unit 806 are arranged. It is

A character 826a (which may be different from the character 826a in FIG. 40(a-1)) is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41 for the purpose of increasing attention to the "tiger mode". In addition, a light guide plate 810c is fitted in the opening 810a of the falling accessory 810, and the light guide plate 810c reflects the light from the light source of the light guide plate 810c. 827. Here, as described above, the mode display section 6
74, the character lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812 are aligned on the same straight line (virtual line 8 in FIG. 37).
22) placed above.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 40(c-2), a falling accessory 810 falls in the same manner as described above as an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. At this time, the light guide plate 810c overlaps the character 826a, and the graphic 827 overlaps the "eyes" of the character 826a.
26a forms a display mode as if wearing sunglasses. That is, the display content displayed on the display device 41 and the display content displayed on the falling accessory 810 are combined to form one display content (character). It should be noted that, for example, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 return to their initial positions when the performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit ends, but the movable accessory 820
is maintained in its final position.

When the variable probability state ends and the normal game state is entered, the movable accessory 820 returns to the initial position. On the other hand, even if the special figure variation display game becomes a small win during the variable probability state and shifts to the small win state, the small win state ends in a short time, so the movable accessory 820 can be maintained at the final position. preferred. Also, during the probability variation state, the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit, and the probability variation state ends and the jackpot state (
special game state), the movable accessory 820 may return to the initial position if the number of rounds of the big win (upper limit of the number of rounds) is large, or it is maintained at the final position if the number of rounds of the big win is small. may

In addition, not limited to the above, in the case where the expectation of a big hit in a variable display game is high (that is,
under predetermined conditions), by vibrating the movable accessory 820, etc., the accessory lamp 820a
Even in the variable probability state, the mode display section 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the big winning opening unit 806 may be off the same straight line (virtual line 822 in FIG. 37). again,
The falling character 810 may be lengthened so that the light guide plate 810c and the character 826a are arranged on the virtual line 822 in FIG. 37 when the falling character 810 falls.

In any of the above modes, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 do not interfere, and the right-handed instruction display 620, the 4th pattern 671 of the special figure 1, and the 4th pattern 672 of the special figure 2 ,
The special figure 2 reserved number display part 660, the special figure 2 reserved number display part 660, and the variable display area 615 are not hidden by the movable role 820 or the falling role 810, and these are visible. However, the display position of the mode display section 674 can be changed depending on the game state and the states of the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810, and may overlap the movable accessory 820 or the falling accessory 810.
In addition, the specific display 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41, and then the falling accessory 810 falls. may be displayed.

[Structure of movable accessories]
41 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. FIG. The movable accessory 820 (accessory unit) of the present embodiment includes a movable accessory main body 950 and a movable accessory 820 connected to the game board 30 (not shown in FIG. 41).
A base member 952 for attaching to, an upper guide member 954 that guides the upper part of the movable accessory main body 950 (decorative member 960), and a lower guide member 956 that guides the lower part of the movable accessory main body 950 (decorative member 960). It is configured.

The movable accessory main body 950 has an upper movable portion 970 movable in the vertical direction and a lower movable portion 982 movable in the horizontal direction. In addition, the movable accessory main body 950 includes an upper slide guide member 976 that defines the movable range of the upper movable portion 970, and a lower slide guide base member 978 (lower slide guide member 979) that defines the movable range of the lower movable portion 982. When viewed from the front, it has an L-shaped outer shape due to the upper slide guide member 976 and the lower slide guide base member 978 (see FIG. 42).

The movable accessory main body 950 has a decorative member 960 that operates as a link mechanism between the upper movable part 970 and the lower movable part 982 by being rotatably attached to the upper movable part 970 and the lower movable part 982. . The decorative member 960 also includes a guide member 964 a (pin) that contacts the upper guide member 954 and a guide member 964 b (pin) that contacts the lower guide member 956 .

The base member 952 is formed by integrating a vertical portion 952a extending vertically to which the upper slide guide member 976 and the like are connected and a horizontal portion 952b extending horizontally to which the lower slide guide base member 978 is attached. It has an L-shaped profile when viewed from the front.

The upper guide member 954 has a vertically extending guide surface 95 with which the guide member 964a contacts.
4a. The lower guide member 956 is a member provided with a guide surface 956a extending in the left-right direction and in contact with the guide member 964b. Guide surface 954a and guide surface 956a
are arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10, and the guide surface 95 as will be described later.
4a and the guide surface 956a each have a curved surface shape forming one curved surface (see FIG. 45, etc.).

Boss-shaped screw holes 978a (two places) are arranged in the lower slide guide base member 978, and the positions facing the screw holes of the lower guide member 956 (connected by broken lines in the figure). ) are arranged with insertion holes 956b (two places), and by inserting screws (not shown) into the insertion holes 956b and screwing them into the screw holes 978a, the movable accessory main body 950 and the lower guide member 956 are connected. A boss-shaped screw hole 954b is arranged in the lower part of the upper guide member 954, and the screw hole 954b of the lower guide member 956 is arranged.
An insertion hole (not shown) is arranged at a position corresponding to the upper guide member 954 and the lower guide member 956 by inserting a screw (not shown) through the insertion hole and screwing it into the screw hole 954b. be.

Here, the decorative member 960 changes its inclination angle while sliding along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979 as will be described later. However, the decorative member 960
are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction from the guide surfaces 954a and 956a, and even if the decorative member 960 moves, they do not interfere with the guide surfaces 954a and 956a.

42 is a detailed exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the movable accessory main body 950 is composed of a decorative member 960, an upper movable portion 970, a lower movable portion 982, and the like.

The decorative member 960 includes a decorative base member 961 , an LED board 962 and a decorative front plate 963 . The decorative member 960 has a form in which the LED board 962 is accommodated from the opening of the decorative base member 961 and the opening of the decorative base member 961 is closed by the decorative front plate 963. The decorative base member 961 and the decorative front plate 963 forms the outline of the ornamental member 960 .

The decorative base member 961 has a housing portion 961a capable of housing the LED board 962. As shown in FIG. A rotating shaft 961b rotatably supported by a bearing portion 970b (to be described later) is disposed on the upper side of the rear surface of the housing portion 961a, and a rotating shaft 961c is rotatably supported by a bearing portion 982a (to be described later) on the lower side. are placed.

In addition, a support portion 961 for supporting the guide member 964a is provided on the upper portion of the decorative base member 961.
d (dowel hole) is arranged, and a support portion 961e (dowel hole) for supporting the guide member 964b is also arranged in the lower part.

The guide member 964a has a pin shape whose base end is fitted into the support portion 961d, and the side surface of the pin contacts the guide surface 954a and is slidable relative to the guide surface 954a (FIG. 41). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a pin shape whose base end is fitted into the support portion 961e, and the side surface of the pin contacts the guide surface 956a and is slidable on the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41). .

As another form, the guide member 964a is a shaft portion (
and a roller portion rotatably supported by the shaft portion (dowel). Figure 4
1). Similarly, the guide member 964b includes a shaft portion (dowel) fitted in the support portion 961e,
A roller portion is rotatably supported by a shaft portion (dowel), and the roller portion is in point contact with the guide surface 956a so that it can roll (slid) on the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41).

The LED board 962 has a large number of LED lamps 962a arranged on the entire surface on the side of the decorative front plate 963, and part of the LED lamps 962a is the LED lamp 823a (FIG. 38) of the accessory lamp 820a and the LED lamp 823b (FIG. 38).

The decorative front plate 963 is made of, for example, a translucent material as a whole, and the LED substrate 9
The light from the LED lamps located at 62 can be transmitted to some extent. again,
Accessory lamp 820a (LED lamp 823a and LED lamp 823b
) is formed with a window portion 963a (opening or transparent portion), and the window portion 9
The light of the accessory lamp 820a can be surely visually recognized from 63a.

The upper movable portion 970 has an upper slide guide member 976 , a rack gear member 967 and a base guide member 966 as members fixed to the base member 952 . Also, the upper movable portion 97
0 includes a driving source 968, an upper movable portion main body 970a, a relay movable substrate 972, a wiring guard member 974, a relay movable substrate holding member 971, and the like, as members movable in the vertical direction.

The upper slide guide 976 includes a rail 976a extending in the vertical direction and a slider 976b sliding along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a. The rail 976a has a plurality of insertion holes 976c communicating with a plurality of screw holes 952c formed in the vertical portion 952a.
The rail 976a is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by inserting a screw (not shown) through each insertion hole 976c and screwing the screw into the screw hole 952c.

The rack gear member 967 is a vertically extending member, and is arranged such that a linear gear 967a faces a pinion gear 968a, which will be described later. The rack gear member 967 is formed with insertion holes 967b through which screws (not shown) are inserted at a plurality of different positions (four locations) in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, in the vertical portion 952a, a plurality of boss-shaped screw holes 952d are formed at different positions in the horizontal direction from the insertion hole 976c. screw hole 9
52d communicates with the insertion hole 967b on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, the rack gear member 967 is
A screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 967b while the through hole 967b and the screw hole 952d are in communication with each other, and the screw (not shown) is screwed into the screw hole 952d to be fixed to the vertical portion 952a.

The base guide member 966 is a member extending in the vertical direction, and is the upper movable portion main body 970a (
The sliding portion 970d) contacts and slides. In addition, the base guide member 966 has insertion holes 966a through which screws (not shown) are inserted at both ends in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, the mounting position of the base guide member 966 of the vertical portion 952a (position different from the mounting positions of the upper slide guide 976 and the rack gear member 967) has a boss-shaped screw hole 952e.
are arranged (the lower screw holes are not shown). Therefore, the base guide member 966
is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through-hole 966a while the through-hole 966a and the screw hole 952e are in communication, and screwing the screw (not shown) into the screw hole 952e. .

The upper movable portion main body 970a is integrated with the bearing portion 970b and the mounting portion 970c. The bearing portion 970b rotatably supports a rotary shaft 961b attached to the decorative base member 961. As shown in FIG. The attachment portion 970 c is attached to the slider 976 b of the upper slide guide member 976 . As a result, the upper movable portion main body 970a moves toward the slider 97.
It moves up and down according to the slide motion of 6b. The sliding portion 970d abuts on the surface of the base guide member 966 on the front side of the game machine 10 and is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the base guide member 966 .

A driving source 968 (motor) having a pinion gear 968a is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 . The drive source 968 is fixed to the upper movable section main body 970 by being screwed (at two locations) to the upper movable section main body 970 .

The drive source 968 rotates a circular pinion gear 968 a , and the pinion gear 968 a engages (engages) with the gear 967 a of the rack gear member 967 . Therefore, when the drive source 968 is driven, the pinion gear 968a rotates and moves along the longitudinal direction (up-down direction) of the rack gear member 967 without slipping, so that the upper movable portion main body 9
70 moves vertically.

At this time, the slider 976b attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 slides vertically along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a, and the sliding portion 970d of the upper movable portion main body 970 contacts the base guide member 966 and slides vertically. do. Therefore, the upper movable portion main body 970 is supported at two points by the rail 976a and the base guide member 966, which are located at different positions, so that displacement in directions other than the vertical direction is restricted, and there is no shaking in the horizontal direction (back and forth direction, left and right direction). (without the pinion gear 968a coming off the gear 967a). For example, when the drive source 968 drives in the forward rotation, the upper movable portion body 970 descends, and when the drive source 968 drives in the reverse rotation, the upper movable portion body 970 rises.

A movable relay substrate 972 (a wiring guard member 974 and a movable relay substrate holding member 971 ) is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 . The relay movable board 972 is, for example, electrically connected to the production control device 300, the drive source 968, and the LED board 962 (character lamp 820a), and transmits a drive signal based on the signal transmitted from the production control device 300 to the drive source. 968, and transmits a signal representing the lighting pattern of the LED lamp to the LED board 962 (the role lamp 820a).

As mounting members for the movable relay board 972, a wiring guard member 974 and a movable relay board pressing member 971 are used. The movable relay board pressing member 971 is to sandwich the movable relay board 972 from the width direction of the movable relay board 972 together with the wiring guard member 974. The movable relay board 972 is screwed to the wiring guard member 974 (at two locations) while the movable relay board 972 is sandwiched. ) is done.
The wiring guard member 974 is a member for preventing wiring (not shown) or the like connected to the relay movable substrate 972 from coming into contact with other parts due to the movement of the upper movable section main body 970 and breaking the wiring.
Also, the wiring guard member 974 is in a state (
It is screwed (at two places) to the upper movable section main body 970 with the relay movable board 972 sandwiched therebetween.

The lower slide guide base member 978 is attached to the horizontal portion 952b of the base member 952, and has a plurality of screw holes (not shown) on the side surface facing the horizontal portion 952b. On the other hand, an insertion hole 952f communicating with the screw hole is arranged in the horizontal portion 952b. Therefore, the lower slide guide base member 978 is fixed to the horizontal portion 952b by inserting a screw (not shown) through the insertion hole 952f and screwing it into the screw hole.

The base end of the lower slide guide base member 978 extends from the vertical portion 952 a of the base member 952 .
, and an urging member unit 981, which will be described later, is attached to the proximal end.

In addition, the lower slide guide base member 978 has an inclined surface 978b whose distal end is on the far side from the vertical portion 952a and which is gently inclined from the proximal side to the distal side of the lower slide guide base member 978 when attached.

A lower slide guide member 979 (rail) is attached to the inclined surface 978b. A plurality of insertion holes 979a are formed in the bottom surface of the lower slide guide member 979 along the longitudinal direction.
A screw hole 978c is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 979a of the inclined surface 978b, and a screw (
(not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 979a and screwed into the screw hole 978c, thereby fixing the lower slide guide member 979 to the lower slide guide base member 978 (inclined surface 978b).

The lower movable portion 982 is attached to the lower slide guide base member 978 . The lower movable portion 982 includes a bearing portion 982a that rotatably supports a rotating shaft 961c arranged on the ornamental base member 961, and supports the bearing portion 982a and extends along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. and a slider 982b which is a base of the slide portion 982b and which is attached to the lower slide guide member 979 and is slidable along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. And prepare.

In the above configuration, when the driving source 968 is driven in the forward direction to apply downward force to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970 transmits the force to the decoration base member 961 via the rotating shaft 961b. By the way, the decorative base member 961 includes the upper movable part main body 970 and the lower movable part 9
82 and functions as a link mechanism that transmits force between the upper movable portion main body 970 and the lower movable portion 982 . Therefore, when the decorative base member 961 receives force from the drive source 968, the upper movable portion main body 970 (bearing portion 970b) and the lower movable portion 982 (bearing portion 982)
82a), the upper movable portion main body 970 moves downward in the vertical direction, and the lower movable portion 98
2 moves toward the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979 . At this time, the decorative base member 961 (ornamental member 960) tilts from an upright state by moving the upper portion downward in the vertical direction and moving the lower portion toward the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979. Conversely, when the drive source 968 is reversely driven to apply an upward force to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decorative base member 961 perform the operations opposite to those described above.

In order to reliably perform the above operation, in the initial state (normal game state), the rotating shaft 961c is located vertically below the rotating shaft 961b (bottom dead center of the link mechanism) at the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. The decorative base member 961 should be designed to be placed in a displaced position.

FIG. 43 is an exploded view of the biasing member unit 981 that constitutes the movable accessory main body 950. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43, the biasing member unit 981 includes a spring-shaped biasing member 981b, a front cover member 981c supporting the biasing member 981b so that the biasing member 981b is wound, and a front cover member 981b. 981c, the front cover member 981c and the biasing member 981b
and an urging base member 981i that accommodates an integrated body 981a consisting of the front cover member 981c, the urging member 981b, and the rear cover member 981g and is attached to the lower slide guide base member 978, and the integrated body 981a and a pin 981m that passes through the biasing base member 981i to rotatably support the one piece 981a to the biasing base member 981i.

The urging member 981 b is, for example, a Conston spring, and its extension direction matches the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979 . Moreover, it is preferable that the biasing member 981b has a substantially constant restoring force (biasing force) regardless of the amount of extension, and the number of windings can be arbitrarily applied. Note that the tip of the biasing member 981b is connected to the lower movable portion 982 (see FIG. 44).

The front cover member 981c includes a cylindrical portion 981d around which the biasing member 981b is wound, and a cylindrical portion 981d.
81d (on the front side of the game machine 10) coaxially attached to the side surface of the game machine 10, and has a flange portion 981e having a larger diameter than the cylindrical portion 981d. A proximal end of the biasing member 981b is connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. The rear cover member 981g has the same shape as the flange portion 981e and is coaxially connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. Moreover, the flange portion 981e, the rear cover member 981
A through hole 981f and a through hole 981h through which the pin 981m is inserted are respectively formed at the center of each of g.

The tip of the pin 981m is a male screw 981n, and the male screw 981n is connected to the female screw 98.
1p. Further, an insertion hole 981j and an insertion hole 981k through which the pin 981m is inserted are formed in the biasing base member 981i. Therefore, by housing the integrated member 981a in the biasing base member 981i, inserting the pin 981m through the insertion hole 981j, the insertion hole 981f, the insertion hole 981h, and the insertion hole 981k, and screwing the male screw 981n into the female screw 981p, A biasing member unit 981 is constructed.

When the urging member 981b is pulled in this state, the urging member 981b is extended from the one piece 981a and the one piece 981a rotates. When the biasing member 981b is released in this state, the biasing member 981b is wound around the integrated object 981a by its own restoring force, and at this time, the integrated object 981a rotates in the opposite direction due to the restoring force.

44A and 44B are perspective views showing the operation of the lower movable part 982 that guides the movement of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. Each case is shown when the biasing member 981b is extended.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the lower movable portion 982 is in the initial state (normal game state),
It is arranged on the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979 . Then, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the lower movable portion 982 can be moved to the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979. As shown in FIG. In this case, the lower movable portion 982 is such that the slide portion 982b is connected to the bearing portion 982a and the decorative member 9.
It can be moved to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979 by receiving the force from the drive source 968 (and the load of the decoration member 960 and the upper movable portion 970) via the 60. Further, a restoring force is generated in the biasing member 981b by being drawn out from the integrated object 981a.

On the other hand, when the driving source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 can return to the base end side by the restoring force of the biasing member 981b. However, a load is applied to the lower movable portion 982 from the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) to slide it in the distal direction. In addition, the lower slide guide member 979 is inclined toward the distal end, and the lower movable portion 982 receives force to slide toward the distal end due to its own weight.

Therefore, it is preferable to design the restoring force of the biasing member 981b to match the force of sliding in the distal direction. As a result, even if the drive source 968 stops, the lower movable portion 98
2 can remain in the position when the drive source 968 is stopped. By rotating the drive source 968 in reverse, the lower movable portion 982 and the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) can be returned to their initial positions, and the load on the drive source 968 at that time can be reduced. can be done. Therefore, the lower movable portion 982 can be smoothly slid on the lower slide guide member 979 by driving the driving source 968 forward and backward.

By the way, the lower movable part 982 can be moved between the intermediate position (FIGS. 47 and 48) and the maximum position (FIGS. 49 and 50).
) may be executed to make a round trip between. As the effect, for example, in order to make it appear that the small hit rush (variable probability state) ends, the movable accessory 820 is intentionally moved from the maximum position (final position, see FIG. 37) corresponding to the small hit rush (variable probability state) to the intermediate position ( (See FIG. 36), but since the small hit rush has not actually ended yet, it is immediately returned to the maximum position. During such production, the movable accessory 820 (lower movable part 982
) is not smooth (because the restoring force is not constant depending on the position of the movable accessory 820 if it is a normal spring), the movement will reveal that it is a “fake effect”.
However, if the movement is smooth as described above, the result can be hidden until the movement is completely completed, and the effect can be watched until the end.

The restoring force of the biasing member 981b (the force that returns the biasing member 981b to the proximal side) is a force that slides in the distal direction due to the load of the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) and the weight of the lower movable portion 982. (the force that pulls the biasing member 981b toward the distal end side). Thus, when the driving source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 and the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) can be smoothly returned to their initial positions by the biasing force of the biasing member 981b.

[Operation of the main body of the movable accessory]
45 is a front view (initial position) of the movable accessory body 950. FIG. 46 is a back view of FIG. 45. FIG. FIG. 47 is a front view (intermediate position) of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. Figure 48, Figure 47
It is a back view of. 49 is a front view (maximum position, final position) of the movable accessory body 950. FIG. 50 is a back view of FIG. 49. FIG.

The operation of the movable accessory main body 950 will be described. First, the initial position (
In the normal game state (see FIG. 35), the upper movable portion 970 is arranged at the highest position, the lower movable portion 982 is arranged at the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979, and the decorative member 960 is raised in the longitudinal direction. (with the largest tilt angle).

Here, the guide surface 954a has a vertical surface as a whole, but has a shape curved toward the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979 at the lower portion. In addition, the guide surface 956a has a shape forming substantially the same curved surface as the guide surface 954a in the area adjacent to the guide surface 954a, and has an inclined surface (curved surface) that is inclined in the same manner as the lower slide guide member 979 in the intermediate area. The tip region has a curved surface that rises so that the inclination increases toward the tip. The guide member 964a is in contact (or point contact) with the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the guide surface 956a.

In the above arrangement, when the drive source 968 is driven in the normal direction, the upper movable portion 970 (upper movable portion main body 970a) is lowered, and the lower movable portion 982 is moved to the upper movable portion 970 via the decorative member 960 (link mechanism). It receives force from (the upper movable portion main body 970a) and moves to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. As shown in FIG. At that time, the guide member 964a slides (or rolls) downward on the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b slides (or rolls) on the guide surface 956a toward the distal end of the lower slide guide member 979, thereby decreases in inclination angle.

Further, the rotary shaft 961b rotates relative to the upper movable portion 970 based on the change in the tilt angle, and the rotary shaft 961c also rotates relative to the lower movable portion 982 based on the change in the tilt angle. Furthermore, the biasing member 981b is extended from the biasing member unit 981 by the amount of movement of the lower movable portion 982 toward the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979 .

Next, at the intermediate position shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 (for example, time-saving state, see FIG. 36), the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the intermediate region of the guide surface 956a. on the other hand,
The guide member 964a is spaced apart from the guide surface 954a. In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in front of the lower center of the display device 41 (see FIG. 36).

At the maximum position shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 (variable state, see FIG. 37), the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the tip region of the guide surface 956a. Along with this, the rotary shaft 961c (bearing portion 982a) rises inside the slide portion 982b. In order to perform this operation reliably, the slide portion 982b must be formed so that its longitudinal direction is inclined toward the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979 with respect to the normal line of the lower slide guide member 979 .
In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in front of the lower right end of the display device 41 (see FIG. 37).

47 to 50, when the drive source 968 stops, the movement of the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decorative member 960 stops. position. Further, when the drive source 968 is reversely driven, the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decorative member 960 can be returned to their initial positions.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state (big win, small win) when the result of the game (variation display game) is a special result operates in the special game state. A possible variable winning device (big winning opening unit 806), a first light emitting means (character lamp 820a) capable of emitting light corresponding to the special game state, and a specific game state different from the special game state (definite variable state A second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) that emits suggestive light to indicate that (a small hit rush can occur)), and the first light emitting means (character lamp 820a) is the second light emitting means ( When the RUSH lamp 812) performs suggestive light emission, the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806) and the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812)
is arranged on a virtual line 822 that includes a line connecting the .

As a result, the change in the game state and the place to watch at that time (special variable winning device 38) are
Character lamps 820a, RUSH lamps 812, and big winnings unit 806 make it easy for the player to grasp (through virtual lines 822 that the player can recall).

In the second embodiment, the execution time of the game (variation display game) when the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) emits suggestive light is the execution time of the game (variation display game) in the normal game state different from the special game state. characterized by being shorter than As a result, for example, when a small winning rush is occurring, the variation display game is quickly performed to enhance the feeling of rush, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 capable of displaying a predetermined effect is provided, and the display device 41 can display a specific image (effect image 617) according to the special game state. is displayed on the virtual line 822 . As a result, the player can see the effect image 617, the character lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, (
Optionally, the mode display unit 674) recognizes the presence of the virtual line 822, and the virtual line 8
It becomes easier to turn the line of sight to the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device 38) arranged on 22.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 can display the first suggestive information (mode display section 674) suggesting that the probability of entering the special game state is high in conjunction with the suggestive light emission (suggestive light emission of the variable probability state). and the first suggestion information (mode display portion 674) is displayed on the virtual line 822. FIG. As a result, the player can see the mode display section 674, character lamps 820a, R
The existence of the virtual line 822 is recognized by the USH lamp 812 (optionally the effect image 617), and the line of sight becomes easy to turn to the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device 38) arranged on the virtual line 822.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 provides second suggestive information (arrow image 619 ) can be displayed, and the second suggestive information (arrow image 619 ) is displayed on the virtual line 822 . As a result, the line of sight of the player is directed to the big winning opening unit 806 (
It can be reliably directed to the special variable winning device 38).

In the second embodiment, the first light emitting means (character lamp 820a) is the second light emitting means (RU
It is characterized by emitting light in a light emission mode related to the light emission mode of the SH lamp 812). This makes it possible for the role lamp 820a to support the suggestion of a small hit rush by the RUSH lamp 812, making it easier to turn the line of sight to the big winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device 38).

In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) is characterized in that it emits light in a light emission mode different from suggestive light emission in the special game state (jackpot). This makes it possible to distinguish between the suggestion of a small win rush and the suggestion of a big win.

In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) is arranged on the opposite side of the first light emitting means (character lamp 820a) across the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806). Characterized by As a result, when the accessory lamp 820a and the RUSH lamp 812 are turned on, it is possible to draw attention to the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device) sandwiched between them.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes a unit (general winning opening unit 808) having a winning opening (general winning opening 35), and when the game (variation display game) results in a special result, a special In the gaming machine 10 that generates the game state, the unit (general winning mouth unit 8
08) on the front is a decorative part (sticker 81
5), the sticker 815 displays general winning hole position information (position information 819a, 819b) indicating the position of the winning hole (general winning hole 35) and related information 817 related to the special game state. It is characterized by

As a result, the seal 815 displays the prize winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, so that the player can pay attention to it. Also, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the content of the special game state can be easily understood.

In addition, by applying the sticker 815 reflecting the relevant information 817 to other models having different related information 817, the general winning entry unit 808 can be applied to other models, and the general winning entry unit 808 versatility can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, the unit (general prize winning unit 808) has a collective display device 50 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 so as to be visible from the front of the unit (general winning prize unit 808), The related information 817 is characterized by being information about the display mode of the collective display device 50 . Thereby, the gaming state displayed on the collective display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817 .

The second embodiment is characterized in that the related information 817 is information relating to the duration (round) of the special game state. Thereby, the round information displayed on the collective display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817 .

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized in that the area overlapping the collective display device 50 when the unit (general prize winning unit 808) is viewed from the front is open. As a result, the seal 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the collective display device 50. FIG. Also, even if the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to open the portion overlapping with the collective display device 50 . As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the collective display device 50 becomes difficult to see due to reflection of light on the surface of the seal 815 . Also, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the collective display device 50 .

In the second embodiment, the sticker 815 is characterized in that the area overlapping the collective display device 50 when the unit (general prize winning unit 808) is viewed from the front is transparent.
As a result, the seal 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general prize winning port unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the collective display device 50. FIG.

In the second embodiment, the sticker 815 includes related information 817 on the collective display device 50.
The feature is that highlighting information 815b for emphasizing the position where the lighting display is performed is displayed. As a result, the lighting display portion (round display portion 60) corresponding to the related information 817 on the collective display device 50 can be grasped with certainty.

In the second embodiment, the unit (general prize-winning unit 808) has an out-port 30b into which an out-ball flows, and the seal 815 displays out-port position information (position information 818a) indicating the position of the out-port 30b. It is characterized by being This allows the unit (
It is possible to grasp the position of the out port 30b in the general winning port unit 808).

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized by having a shape that follows the outline of the front surface of the unit (general prize winning port unit 808). This allows the unit of seal 815 (
It is possible to easily perform positioning before sticking to the general winning hole unit 808).

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 70. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Also, in the following embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device and performance control device]
FIG. 51 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, gaming machine 1
A game control device 100 (main board) is arranged at the lower part of the back surface of 0. Game control device 10
0 is covered with a transparent case 100a so that it can be visually recognized from the outside of the case 100a.

In addition, on the back of the game machine 10, on the game control device 100 (main board) or on the game control device 1
00, a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged.
The setting key switch 93 can be operated by opening the lid portion 93a.

In the game machine 10, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the setting becomes variable. The current probability set value is displayed, and the probability set value can be changed by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 which is also used as a set value change switch. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the variable setting state is terminated and the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) is also turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off, the setting confirmation state is entered, and the performance display device 152 displays the current probability setting value. By turning it off, the setting confirmation state is terminated, and the performance display device 152 is also turned off.

A performance control device 300 is arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the game machine 10 . Production control device 300
is accommodated in a transparent sub-board box 841 , and the sub-board box 841 is attached to the back of the gaming machine 10 .

[Structure of sub-board box]
FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of a sub board box 841 that houses the effect control device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, the sub-board box 841 includes the production control device 300 and the ROM board 8.
40. The ROM board 840 stores information about the content of the effect of the effect control device 300, and stores information unique to each model of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The sub-board box 841 includes a box lower member 842 attached to the back of the gaming machine 10 .
And, while engaging with the box lower member 842, the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840
a box upper member 843 (first case member) that forms an internal space 841a that accommodates the The fastening screw 8 attached to the box upper member 843
and a cover member 859 (crimping member) that conceals 58 .

A plurality of insertion holes 844a are formed in the outer edge of the effect control device 300, and screws 844b are inserted through the insertion holes 844a. A plurality of insertion holes 844a are also formed in the ROM board 840, and screws 844b are inserted through the insertion holes 844a.

A socket 844c is arranged in the production control device 300, and a connector 840a to be fitted into the socket 844c is arranged in the ROM board 840. - 特許庁and connector 840
a is fitted into the socket 844 c , and an integrated object of the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 is attached to the box lower member 842 . Note that the mounting positions of the socket 844c and the connector 840a may be interchanged.

The box lower member 842 is a tray-shaped member whose side facing the box upper member 843 is open, and is a member in which the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are attached. The box lower member 842 is provided with a screw hole 842a at a position facing the insertion hole 844a arranged in the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, in a state in which the insertion hole 844a and the screw hole 842a are communicated, the screw 844b is inserted into the insertion hole 844a, and the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are attached to the box lower member 842 by screwing the screw hole 842a. be done.

The box lower member 842 has a plurality of ribs 842b (convex portions) that come into contact with the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840. As shown in FIG. The rib 842b avoids interference with the devices arranged in the effect control device 300 and the devices arranged in the ROM board 840 and directly contacts the board (see FIG. 55). Thereby, the bending of the production|presentation control apparatus 300 and ROM board|substrate 840 after attachment can be reduced.

The box upper member 843 is a tray-shaped member having an outer shape substantially similar to that of the box lower member 842 and having an opening on the side facing the box lower member 842 . The box upper member 843 is formed with a large number of ventilation holes 843a to release the heat generated from the effect control device 300 to the outside. In addition, a notch 8 is provided at a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the ROM board 840 of the box upper member 843 .
43b are formed. The box upper member 843 is cut along the notch 843b using nippers or the like so that the ROM substrate 840 can be taken out. gaming machine 10
In the development stage of , the ROM board 840 may be frequently removed, so the notch 843b is provided in consideration of work efficiency. Of course, during normal use, the ventilation hole 843
Plays the same role as a.

A display area 843c is provided on the surface of the box upper member 843. In the display area 843c, a sticker or an information display board describing the specifications of the game machine 10 is arranged.

The box bottom member 842 and the box top member 843 have formations for engaging each other. The upper portion of the box lower member 842 is provided with two first engaged portions 845 , and the upper portion of the box upper member 843 is provided with two first engaging portions 846 . The first engaged portion 845 has a claw shape extending upward from the box lower member 842 and bent in a direction away from the box upper member 843 from a midway position. The first engaging portion 846 is connected to the box upper member 8
43, an engaging hole 846a extending toward the box lower member 842 and into which the first engaged portion 845 is inserted and engaged.

In addition, a second engaged portion 847 is provided at the bottom of the box lower member 842 so that the box upper member 8
43 also has a second engagement portion 848 . The second engaging portion 848 is connected to the second engaged portion 847
It can be deformed so that it can be detachably fitted into the housing. Further, the second engaged portion 847 is also the second
A space is provided for deforming the second engaging portion 848 to disengage the engaging portion 848 .

The engagement between the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 is performed by inserting the first engaging hole 846 a of the first engaging portion 846 into the engaging hole 846 a of the first engaging portion 846 while the box upper member 843 is inclined with respect to the box lower member 842 .
The engaged portion 845 is inserted (engaged), and the box upper member 843 is moved to the first engaging portion 84 in this state.
6 to face the box lower member 842 and the second engaging portion 848
is engaged with the second engaged portion 847 . Conversely, when releasing the engagement, the second engaging portion 84
8 is deformed to release the engagement with the second engaged portion 847, the box upper member 843 can be rotated (turned up) about the first engaging portion 846 in the opposite direction.

The box lower member 842 has a plurality of rear engaging portions 842c that engage with the rear surface of the gaming machine 10 (FIGS. 55 and 56).

FIG. 53 is a front view of the box upper member 843 to which the cover member 859 is attached.
FIG. 54 is a partial detailed view of FIG. 53 (enlarged view of the part surrounded by the rectangular dashed line in FIG. 53)
54(a) is a diagram without the cover member 859, and FIG. 54(b) is a diagram with the cover member 859 attached. FIG. 55 is a sectional view along line AA of FIG. 53 and its partial detail view. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 53 showing a case where the cover member 859 is attached, and a partial detailed view thereof.

The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are configured to fasten the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 after engagement. The box lower member 842 extends downward from the lower portion of the box lower member 842 and has a lower fastening portion 849 ( FIG. 53 ) with an open side facing the box upper member 843 . The box upper member 843 extends downward from the lower portion of the box upper member 843 and has an upper fastening portion 852 ( 52).
The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened together by fastening screws 858 (fastening means) (FIGS. 53 and 54(a)).

The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 connect the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 84 together.
3 overlap each other when they engage each other, box lower member 842 and box upper member 84
A partitioned space 851 (FIG. 55) different from the internal space 841a formed by 3 is formed. A fastening screw 858 can be accommodated in this partition space 851 .

The lower fastening portion 849 is provided with a screw hole 850 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56), and the upper fastening portion 852 is provided with an insertion hole 854 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56). Also, the screw hole 850
and the insertion hole 854 communicate with each other when the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are overlapped. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened together by introducing the fastening screw 858 from the accommodation portion 853 side of the upper fastening portion 852, inserting it into the insertion hole 854, and screwing it into the screw hole 850. (FIGS. 55 and 56).

A cover member 859 ( FIG. 54 ) is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 to cover the fastening screw 858 in order to prohibit access of a tool (such as a screwdriver) for releasing the fastening of the fastening screw 858 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 and the like, in this embodiment, a pair of lower fastening portions 849 (as a first lower fastening portion and a second lower fastening portion) are arranged, and correspondingly, an upper fastening portion 852 (first lower fastening portion) is also arranged. As a top fastening portion and a second bottom fastening portion), they are arranged in pairs, and have shapes that are left-right reversed to each other when viewed from the front. Correspondingly, the cover member 859 attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 (first upper fastening portion) and the cover member 859 attached to the other of the upper fastening portions 852 (second upper fastening portion) have left and right sides when viewed from the front. has an inverted shape. Also, the upper fastening portion 852
A partition space 851 (first partition space) is formed by overlapping one (first upper fastening portion) and one (first lower connection portion) of the lower fastening portion 849 facing it, and the other of the upper fastening portion 852 (Second
A partitioned space 851 (second partitioned space) is formed by overlapping the other (second lower fastening portion) of the lower fastening portion 849 (see FIGS. 53 and 55).

It should be noted that it is possible to achieve fastening between the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 by fastening only one of the pair of the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 with the fastening screw 858 and not fastening the other. can. At this time, the fastening screw 858 may be accommodated in a partition space 851 formed in the other of the pair of lower fastening portion 849 and upper fastening portion 852 (see FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the accommodating portion 853 has a shape following the outer shape of the cover member 859 as described later. A fixing portion 8 having an insertion hole 854 formed at the bottom of the accommodating portion 853
54a. With the fastening screw 858 inserted through the insertion hole 854, the screw hole 850 (Fig.
2) is screwed to fix the fixing portion 854a to the lower fastening portion 849, so that the housing portion 853
(Upper fastening portion 852 ) can be fastened to the lower fastening portion 849 .

Further, through holes 855 are formed in the upper and lower portions of the fixing portion 854a of the bottom portion of the housing portion 853 . Third engaged portions 856 extend from the upper inner wall and the lower inner wall of the accommodating portion 853 so as to partially cover the through holes 855 when viewed from the front.
extends toward the bottom of the housing 853 (Fig. 55).

[Structure of cover member]
The cover member 859 has a rectangular lid portion 860 viewed from the front and a notch 861 (FIG. 54(b)) projecting outward from one side of the lid portion 860. has a circular opening 862 in the bottom. Correspondingly, as described above, the accommodating portion 853 has an inner wall having a shape that follows the outer shape of the cover member 859 (the lid portion 860 and the notch 861) and the uneven shape. The peripheral edge of the lid portion 860 (and the notch 861) is
When 9 is housed in the housing portion 853 , it abuts against the periphery of the housing portion 853 . As a result, the housing portion 8
53 can be reduced. Also, the cover member 859 (
By forming a notch 861 in the lid portion 860), it is possible to determine the mounting direction of the cover member 859 with the accommodating portion 853 (FIG. 54(b)).

57 is a perspective view of the cover member 859. FIG. 58 is a back view showing the mounting surface of the cover member 859. FIG. 59 is a front view of the cover member 859. FIG. 60 is a left side view of the cover member 859. FIG. FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. Figure 62
59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.

The housing portion 8 is mounted on the mounting surface (the surface facing the housing portion 853) of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860).
A pair of third engaging portions 863 (engaging portions) are arranged to engage on the 53 side (FIGS. 57, 58,
Figure 60). The third engaging portions 863 are arranged in pairs so as to be linearly symmetrical (back to back) across the opening 862 in the vertical direction (or the horizontal direction). The third engaging portion 863 is a member extending in the normal direction of the mounting surface, and has a wedge portion 863a at its tip that protrudes more than the other portion of the third engaging portion 863 and has an arrow-shaped side surface. (Fig. 60).

Correspondingly, the receiving portion 853 is provided with the third engaged portion 856 as described above (FIG. 55). The third engaged portions 856 are arranged as a pair so as to engage with the third engaging portion 863 from the outside, and are inclined to contact the wedge portion 863a of the third engaging portion 863 when the cover member 859 is attached. It has a surface 856a.

The third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are each deformable (
Figure 68). The width of the fixing portion 854a is preferably shorter than the interval between the third engaging portion 863 on one side and the third engaging portion 863 on the other side. As a result, the third engaging portion 863 is
By abutting (pressing) the engaged portion 856, the pair of third engaging portions 863 can be easily deformed in the direction of approaching each other (the direction of approaching the fixing portion 854a). Part 8
63 and the third engaged portion 856 can be easily engaged.

Conversely, the distal end portions of the pair of third engaged portions 856 move away from each other.
and/or by deforming the third engaging portion 863 so that the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 approach each other, the third engaging portion 863 (wedge portion 863a)
and the third engaged portion 856 can be released. Therefore, the third engaging portion 863 is
It is detachably engaged with the third engaged portion 856 .

Fitting portions 864A, 864B, 864C, and 864D (FIGS. 57 and 58) are arranged on the mounting surface of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860). Correspondingly, the housing portion 853 has fitting portions 857A, 857B, 857C, and 857D into which the fitting portions 864A-864D are fitted (FIG. 54(a)). Fitting part 8
By fitting 64A to 864D into the fitting portions 857A to 857D, respectively, rattling of the cover member 859 after the third engaging portion 863 is engaged with the third engaging portion 856 can be reduced. The fitting portion 864A is designed to be wider than the other fitting portions 864B to 864D, and correspondingly, the fitted portion 857A is also designed to be wider than the other fitting portions 857B to 857D. Accordingly, as with the notch 861, the accommodating portion 8 of the cover member 859 is
The orientation of attachment relative to 53 can be determined.

Further, on the mounting surface of the lid portion 860, a reinforcing portion 865A that connects the fitting portion 864A and the fitting portion 964B to reinforce the rigidity of both, and a fitting portion 864C and the fitting portion 864D that are connected to reinforce the rigidity of both. A reinforcing portion 865B is provided (FIGS. 57 and 58).

The opening 862 has a diameter larger than that of the fastening screw 858, and is formed so as to accommodate the fastening screw 858 inside when viewed from the front with the cover member 859 accommodated in the accommodating portion 853. . 58 and 59, cut portions (first cut portion 866 and second cut portion 867) are arranged in the opening 862 so as to cover at least part of the opening 862. As shown in FIGS. The cutting portion opens the opening 862 by cutting itself.

For example, the cutting portion passes through the center of the opening 862 and extends vertically (which may be inclined), and connects to the upper and lower ends of the inner wall of the opening 862. A first cutting portion 866 (FIGS.
58, 59, and 61) and the first cutting portion 86 when viewed from the front of the opening 862.
A second cut 867 (Fig. 57,
58, 59 and 62), and the opening 862 is covered in a cross shape (FIGS. 57 and 58) by the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867. FIG. The second cutting portion 867 is arranged so as to protrude toward the front side of the lid portion 860 (the side opposite to the side where the third engaging portion 863 is arranged) (see FIG. 6).
0, FIG. 62), and is connected to the lid portion 860 at a position on the outer periphery of the opening 862 (FIGS. 59, 62).

The cut portion (first cut portion 866, second cut portion 867) covers the front of the fastening screw 858 so that a screwdriver or the like cannot access the fastening screw 858 for fraud prevention. but,
When repairing or replacing the performance control device 300 or the ROM board 840, it is necessary to cut the cut portion to open the opening 862 and remove the fastening screw 858. The cut portion is cut by a cutting means such as nippers.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the thickness of the first cut portion 866 is preferably formed to be thinner than the thickness of the lid portion 860 . This facilitates cutting of the first cutting portion 866 . Also, as shown in FIG. 62, it is also preferable to form a groove 867b in the second cut portion 867 from the mounting surface (rear surface) side. Thus, the second cut portion 867 can be easily cut by cutting the portion where the groove 867b is formed. Here, the groove 867b may have any shape, and may form a concentric circle with the opening 862 as shown in FIGS. If the cutting strength of the cutting means such as nippers is sufficient, the thickness of the first cutting portion 866 may be the same as the thickness of the lid portion 860, and the groove 867b of the second cutting portion 867 may be omitted. .

63A and 63B are diagrams showing a cut area 866a of the first cut portion 866 of the cover member 859, FIG. 63(a) being a front view and FIG. 63(b) being a rear (mounting surface) view. 64A and 64B are diagrams showing a cut area 867a of the second cut portion 867 (and the first cut portion 866) of the cover member 859. FIG. 64(a) is a front view, and FIG. surface).

When cutting the cut portion, for example, as shown in FIG. 63, it is preferable to cut the cut region 866a of the first cut portion 866 using a cutting means such as nippers, and then, as shown in FIG. It is preferable to cut the cutting region 867a (groove 867b) of the second cutting portion 867 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, conversely, the cutting region 867a of the second cutting portion 867 may be cut, and then the cutting region of the first cutting portion may be cut. In either case, the cut piece 868 (FIG. 67(a)) separated by cutting the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867 is formed on the front side of the lid portion 860 by the components of the second cut portion 867. has a large weight, the cut piece 868 is attached to the lid portion 8
Dropping on the front side of 60 and dropping on the mounting surface side can be avoided. Thereby, the cut piece 86
8 enters into the partition space 851 (FIG. 55), and the trouble of taking it out can be avoided. Of course, by cutting out the cut piece 868 in a state in which the operator supports the portion to be the cut piece 868 in advance, the cut piece 868 can be more reliably prevented from entering the interior of the housing portion 853 .

[Mounting process of cover member]
65A and 65B show a process of attaching the cover member 859. FIG. 65A shows a process of attaching the fastening screw 858, and FIG. 65B shows a state before the cover member 859 is attached. 66A and 66B show a process of attaching the cover member 859. FIG. 66C shows a state in which the cover member 859 is being attached to the upper box member 843, and FIG. 843 is shown attached.

A process of attaching the cover member 859 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the lower fastening portion 849 (the box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (the box upper member 843)
, and by inserting the fastening screw 858 into the insertion hole 854 of the upper fastening portion 852 and screwing it into the screw hole 850 , the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other. and Figure 65
As shown in (b), the cover member 859 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 853 .

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the cover member 859 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 853, the wedge portion 863a of the third engaging portion 863 forming the cover member 859 contacts the inclined surface 85 of the third engaged portion 856. As shown in FIG.
6a, the third engaging portion 863 applies stress to the third engaged portion 856 due to the so-called wedge effect, and the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed in a direction away from each other. . On the other hand, the third engaging portion 863 receives a resistance (stress) from the third engaged portion 856 and deforms in a direction in which the pair of third engaging portions 863 approach each other. While performing such deformation, the third engaging portion 863 (wedge portion 86
3a) proceeds towards the through hole 855;

As shown in FIG. 66(d), when the wedge portion 863a enters the through hole 855 and the wedge portion 893a passes through the third engaged portion 856, the third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are engaged. The applied stress is released, and the wedge portion 863 a engages with the tip portion of the third engaged portion 856 . As a result, the cover member 859 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 so as to be accommodated in the accommodation portion 853 . Also, at this time, the fitting portions 864A-864D are fitted into the fitting portions 857A-857D.
54(a) and 58).

[Removing process of cover member]
67A and 67B show the process of removing the cover member 859. FIG. 67A shows the process of cutting the cut portion, and FIG. Figure 6
8 is a diagram showing a process of removing the cover member 859, and FIG.
9 from the upper box member 843, FIG.
are removed from the box upper member 843, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867 are cut, the cut piece 868 is taken out, and the opening 862 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), a screwdriver or the like is introduced from the opening 862 to tighten the fastening screw 858.
are released, and the lower fastening portion 849 (the box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (the box upper member 843) are separated.

As shown in FIG. 68( c ), the third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are deformed to remove the wedge portion 863 a from the through hole 855 . At this time, for example, the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 are deformed so as to approach each other, and/or the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed.
are separated from each other to release the engagement between the wedge portion 863a and the tip portion of the third engaged portion 856, and in this state, the wedge portion 863a is pushed toward the lid portion 860 side.
As a result, the wedge portion 863 a contacts the inclined surface 856 a of the third engaged portion 856 . As the wedge portion 863a is further pushed toward the lid portion 860, the deformation of the third engaged portion 856 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 68(d), when the wedge portion 863a is continued to be pushed, the third engaging portion 863
And the third engaged portion 856 returns to its original shape, and the wedge portion 863a separates from the third engaged portion 856, so that the cover member 859 after use is separated from the accommodating portion 853 (upper fastening portion 852). do. In the case of refastening, a new cover member 859 is prepared and the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are reused, and the steps shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 are performed.

[First modification of cover member]
69 is a cross-sectional view of a first modified example of the cover member 859. FIG. Cover member 8 of the first modified example
59a has the same outer shape as the cover member 859 (see FIG. 62), but the portion corresponding to the second cut portion 867 of the cover member 859a is an extension portion 869. As shown in FIG. Extension 869
is connected to the first cut portion 866 in a state of being orthogonal (intersecting) like the second cut portion 867 . However, unlike the second cutting portion 867, it is in contact with the lid portion 860 in a non-connected (not connected) state with the lid portion 860 at a position on the outer circumference of the opening portion 862, or the lid portion 860 is in contact with the lid portion 860 at a predetermined interval.
away from 60.

As a result, a portion of the first cut portion 866 and the extension portion 86 can be separated by simply cutting the first cut portion 866 .
9 is formed and separated from the lid portion 860, work efficiency is improved. Furthermore, since the length of the extending portion 869 forming the cut piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening 862, it is possible to prevent the cut piece 870 from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

[Second modification of cover member]
FIG. 70 shows a second modification of the cover member 859, FIG. 70(a) is a front view, FIG.
) is a back view. The cover member 859b of the second modified example has a configuration in which the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867c are connected within the opening portion 862 . The second cut portion 877c is orthogonal (intersects) with the first cut portion 866 and has both ends connected to the left and right inner walls of the opening 862. The first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867c form a cross-shaped opening. It covers the portion 862 . In this modified example, cutting the cutting area 866a and cutting area 867d may cause the cut piece 871 to enter the inside of the cover member 859b. can also apply the second modification.

In the second modification, the opening 862 is covered with a cross shape, but other shapes than the cross shape may be used as long as a gap is left for the tip of a cutting means such as a nipper to enter the opening 862 . For example, a configuration in which three first cut portions 866 (or second cut portions 867c) are connected to the opening 862 while intersecting each other at 120 degrees may be employed. Alternatively, for example, one first cut portion 866 and two second cut portions 867 may be connected to the opening 862 while intersecting each other at 120 degrees.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second
In the gaming machine 10 having a substrate (effect control device 300) housed in an internal space 841a (sub substrate box 841) formed by a case member (box lower member 842), the first
Fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858) for fastening the case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842), and the first case member (
a cover member 859 arranged to engage with the box upper member 843) and cover the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858);
is detachably engaged with the first case member (box upper member 843).

Conventionally, the cover member (cover member 859) is replaced with the board box (sub-board box 841).
) (when the fastening means (fastening screw 858, etc.) is covered again by the cover member)
There is also the problem that the entire board box to which the cover member is attached after cutting (opening) must be replaced, which is costly. In addition, when the circuit board box that has been opened is refastened by the fastening means, the cover member is cut (opened), so security is vulnerable and there is a risk of fraud.

However, by removing the cover member 859, the first case member (the box upper member 843) and the second case member (the box lower member 842) can be reused with the above configuration, so the cost can be suppressed. Also, the first case member (box upper member 843)
And when the second case member (box lower member 842) is fastened again with the fastening means, the fastening means can be covered with a new cover member 859 after that, so the substrate (production control device 3
00) can be prevented, and costs can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes fastening means (insertion holes 854, screw holes 850
, fastening screws 858 ), and openings 862 are provided with openings 862 .
62, and cut to open the opening 862 (first cut 866, second cut 867, 867c).
This prohibits the access of means (such as a screwdriver) for releasing the fastening of the fastening means (fastening screw 858) from the cut portion. In addition, since the cutting portions (the first cutting portion 866, the second cutting portions 867, 867c) cover the opening 862 with a gap for inserting the tip of the means (nippers, etc.) for cutting the cutting portion, Cutting can be done easily.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is arranged so as to intersect with the first cutting portion 866 having both ends attached to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when viewed from the direction facing the opening 862 from the front. The cover member 859 (lid portion 860) and the second cut portion 867 connected to the first cut portion 866 are provided.
4, screw holes 850 and fastening screws 858) are connected to the opposite surface (front surface) of the surface (mounting surface).

Conventionally, when the cover member is cut, part of the cover member (the part that is cut and removed) falls into or out of the board box, resulting in poor cutting efficiency.

However, with the above configuration, the cutting portion can be realized with a simple configuration, and the first cutting portion 86
6 and the second cut portion 867 are cut and separated, and the cut piece 868 falls to the front side due to the weight of the second cut portion 867 . Therefore, the cut piece 868 does not fall inside the cover member 559, so there is no need to take out the cut piece 868, and the direction in which the cut piece 868 falls can be predicted, so that the complexity of the work can be reduced.

A feature of the third embodiment is that a groove 867 b is formed at the cutting position of the second cutting portion 867 . Thereby, the cutting of the second cutting portion 867 can be easily performed.

In the third embodiment, the cut portion includes a first cut portion 866 having both ends connected to the inner wall of the opening 862 and extending from the first cut portion 866 so as to intersect the first cut portion 866 and having both ends as described above. and a second cutting portion 867c connected to the inner wall. Thereby, a cutting part can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the cut section is arranged so as to intersect the first cut section 866 having both ends connected to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cut section 866 when viewed from the front of the opening 862. and connected to the first cutting portion 866, and the cover member 859 (lid portion 860)
and an extension 869 that is in a non-connected state with the cover member 859 .
It is characterized by being arranged on the opposite surface (front surface) of the surface (mounting surface) facing the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858) of the (cover portion 860).

As a result, a portion of the first cut portion 866 and the extension portion 86 can be separated by simply cutting the first cut portion 866 .
9 is formed and separated from the lid portion 860, work efficiency is improved. Furthermore, since the length of the extending portion 869 forming the cut piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening 862, it is possible to prevent the cut piece 870 from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 has an engaging portion (third engaging portion 863), and the first case member (box upper member 843, upper fastening portion 852) has an engaged portion (third engagement portion 8
56), and when the engaging portion (third engaging portion 863) engages with the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856), the cover member 859 becomes the first case member (box upper member 843, Upper fastening portion 852)
and the engaging portion (third engaging portion 863) and the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856) are deformable in the direction of disengaging each other at the time of engagement. characterized by
As a result, the detachable cover member 859 can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, cover member 859 includes insets 864A-864D,
The first case member (upper fastening portion 852) is characterized by having fitted portions 857A-857D, and the fitting portions 864A-864D are fitted into the fitted portions 857A-857D when engaged. This reduces rattling of the cover member 859 after the third engaging portion 863 engages with the third engaged portion 856 .

In the third embodiment, the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) is attached to the cover member 8 when engaged.
59, and the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) is in contact with the peripheral edge of the storage portion 853 when engaged. As a result, rattling of the cover member 859 accommodated in the accommodation portion 853 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, a notch 861 is formed in the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860), and the housing portion 853 is formed following the contour of the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) including the notch 861. It is characterized by being Accordingly, the orientation of attachment of the cover member 859 to the accommodation portion 853 can be determined.

In the third embodiment, a partition space 851 different from the internal space 841a is provided between the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849).
A screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849) is provided, and the screw (fastening screw 858) can be accommodated in the partition space 851. It is characterized by As a result, even when the fastening screw 858 is not used for fastening, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw 858 from being lost by storing it in the partition space 851 .

In the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) includes the first upper fastening portion (
Upper fastening portion 852) and a second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) arranged at a position different from that of the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852).
and an upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). The second case member (box lower member 842) is
A first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) and a second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) arranged at a position different from the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) are included. By engaging the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842), the first upper fastening portion (
The upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) face each other, and the second upper fastening portion and the second lower fastening portion face each other. The screws are a first screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849), and a second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). ) and a second screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). The partition space 851 is a first partition space (partition space 851
), and a second partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). Then, with the first screw (fastening screw 858) housed in the first partition space (partition space 851), the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening portion are fastened together by the second screw (fastening screw 858). (lower fastening portion 849), or the second screw (fastening screw 858) can be fastened to the second partition space (partition space 8
51), the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 85) is tightened by the first screw (fastening screw 858).
2) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) can be fastened.

With the above configuration, the cover member 859 can be attached to both of the upper fastening portions 852 while the fastening screw 858 is housed in one partition space 851 . When the substrate (effect control device 300) is taken out for inspection or the like, the cover member 859 attached to the other upper fastening portion 852 is opened and the fastening screw 858 used for fastening is removed to remove the substrate (effect control device 300). The control device 300) and the fastening screw 858 housed in one partition space 851 can be taken out. After that, when re-fastening, the unopened cover member 859 attached to one upper fastening portion 852 is once removed from the upper fastening portion 852, and both the upper fastening portion 852 and the lower fastening portion 849 are fastened with fastening screws 858. An unopened cover member 859 can be attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 while fastening them. That is, one partition space 85
By storing the fastening screw 858 in 1, even if it is opened once, it can be fastened again.
A single inspection and refastening can be performed without replacing both of the cover members 859, and cost reduction can be achieved.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 78. FIG. 4th Embodiment is related with the detail of a structure of the upper big prize-winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, big winning unit). Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 71 is an exploded view of the game board 30, the control base unit 813, and the like.

The configuration of the game board 30 is as described above (see FIG. 35, etc.).
In addition to the big winning hole unit 800 housed in 0f, it also has a decorative member 831 arranged on the central side of the game board of the big winning hole unit 800 (the left side here). The decoration member 831 is an opaque member on which a character or the like is drawn. Grand prize mouth unit 80
Make the inside of 0 invisible. A central portion 831a located in the center of the decorative member 831 in the vertical direction is arranged to face the big winning hole unit 800 and cover it from the center side of the game board. An upper portion 831b and a lower portion 831c of the decorative member 831 in the vertical direction may be arranged so as to face the channel unit 802 and the general electrical unit 804 and cover them from the center side of the game board.

A control base unit 813 is attached to the back of the game board 30 . The control base unit 813 includes the falling object 810 (described above), the movable object 820 (described above), and the control unit 83
0 and a logo member 832 . The control unit 830 has a substantially box-like shape and a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction, and accommodates the falling accessory 810 (described above), the movable accessory 820 (described above), the logo member 832, and the like. The control unit 830 integrally includes a rear panel 830a as a bottom, and an upper panel 830b, a right panel 830c, a left panel 830d, and a lower panel 830e as walls.
The back plate 830a has an opening 8 for making the display screen of the display device 41 (FIG. 35) visible.
30f is formed and a display device 41 (FIG. 35) is attached to the back of the opening 830f. Furthermore, behind the control unit 830, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are arranged (FIG. 51).

The falling accessory 810 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the upper plate 830b. The movable accessory 820 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the left plate 830d and the lower plate 830e. The logo member 832 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the lower plate 830e behind the movable accessory 820 on the far side. A logo (characters) such as the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the logo member 832, and the logo is visible to the player through the transparent lower portion of the center case 40 (above the stage portion 40b) (
See Figure 35).

FIG. 72 is an exploded view of the big winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, big winning unit).

The big winning mouth unit 800 includes a big winning unit base 902 and a big winning unit base 902
An intermediate member 904 arranged behind the lower left part of the main unit base 902, and a movable part driving mechanism 906 partly arranged adjacent to the right side of the intermediate member 904 behind the lower right part of the main entrance unit base 902,
A general prize winning opening discharge unit 908 arranged behind the right central part of the big winning unit base 902 and substantially above the movable part driving mechanism 906, and a big winning splash part driving mechanism 910 arranged substantially behind the intermediate member 904 , a transparent front decoration member 91 arranged in front of the large-scale unit base 902
2, and a large winning opening splash portion 914 (feather member) driven by a large winning splash portion driving mechanism 910 to open and close a blade member 914a.

Also, the big winning hole unit 800 includes a winning hole switch 35a for detecting a game ball passing through the general winning hole 35, and a big winning hole switch 43 for detecting a game ball passing through the big winning hole 902h.
(Upper large winning opening switch 39a, large winning counting switch), specific area switch 72 (V switch) for detecting game balls that have passed through specific area 86 (V winning opening), passing through big winning opening 902h is specified A remaining ball outlet switch 73 (detecting means, remaining ball switch) for detecting a game ball that has not passed through the area 86 as a remaining ball is provided. Incidentally, the big winning opening 902h may be defined as an entrance portion (FIGS. 72, 74) opened and closed by a blade member 914a of a first inflow path 917 (FIGS. 75, 77) described later. It may be defined as an opening (FIGS. 72 and 75) of the switch 43 (39a).

The special winning opening unit 800 is formed by combining a special winning opening unit base 902, an intermediate member 904, and a general winning opening discharge unit 908 to form a specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), a remaining ball discharge opening switch 73, and a first A housing including the inflow path 917 (and the second inflow path 918) is configured, and the housing is provided with the general prize winning port 35 and the distribution path of the game balls that have won the general prize winning port 35. As a result, the size of the entire unit is reduced, and the area occupied by the game area 32 (
volume) can be reduced.

The main entrance unit base 902 is a flow path forming member, and is attached so as to cover the front decoration member 912 from the front, thereby forming various flow paths for game balls (upper left flow path 902a, right upper flow path 902b, lower right flow path 902d, etc.). For this reason, the large-inlet unit base 902 includes a plate-like rear surface portion 902f and a rear surface portion 902 provided at various locations.
and a channel wall 902g extending in the front-rear direction from f. Further, a left lower back channel 902c is formed by attaching the channel forming portion 904c of the intermediate member 904 from the rear.

The big winning unit base 902 has a passage frame 902k (a part of the passage wall 902g) that forms a passage for game balls that pass through or have passed through the specific area 86 . The passage frame 902k has a rectangular cross section perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A specific area switch 72 is inserted and mounted in the passage frame 902k, and the opening of the specific area switch 72 (corresponding to the specific area 86) is arranged in the passage frame 902k. On the back portion 902f of the big winning unit base 902, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 43, and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 are arranged facing each other from behind. The big winning unit base 902 has a general winning opening 35 in the upper part, and the winning opening switch 35 a is arranged behind the general winning opening 35 .

From the upper part of the winning unit base 902, the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 43
, a specific area switch 72, and a remaining ball outlet switch 73 are provided in this order. The opening of the big winning opening switch 43 through which the game balls pass is arranged vertically overlapping the rear part of the specific area switch 72 and the front part of the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 (see FIGS. 75 and 77). .

The winning unit base 902 is the bar-shaped magnetic sensor 90 of the general winning opening discharge unit 908.
8a is inserted into the insertion hole 902e, and the shaft portion 914
b has a through hole 902i passing through in the front-rear direction, and a guide hole 902j through which the guide 914c of the big winning opening splash portion 914 is slidably guided. In addition, the large-inlet unit base 902 has an LED board 902m having a plurality of LEDs attached on the rear surface portion 902f. LEDs
When the specific area switch 72 is detected (V winning), the LED on the board 902m
May emit light. A translucent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 7) having a different color and pattern from the front decoration member 912 is placed at a position corresponding to the front opening of the specific region 86 of the large-scale unit base 902.
6) may be attached.

The intermediate member 904 includes an LED substrate 904a having a plurality of LEDs on the upper portion, a through hole 904b through which the shaft portion 914b of the big winning opening splash portion 914 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a flow passage forming portion provided in front of the LED substrate 904a. 904c. The interior of the flow path forming portion 904c is a lower left back flow path 902c, and the large winning opening switch 43 is arranged below the flow path forming portion 904c. The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is attached to the lower portion of the intermediate member 904 with the opening arranged rearward. The LED of the LED board 904a can irradiate light to the lower left back channel 902c, and may emit light when the big winning opening switch 43 detects.

As will be described later, when the blade member 914a of the big winning opening splash portion 914 is in an open state, the upper left flow path 902a or the upper right flow path 902b ( 74) and passed through the big winning opening 902h passes through the lower left back channel 902c and is detected by the big winning opening switch 43. FIG. After that, the game ball detected by the big winning opening switch 43 is detected by the specific area switch 72 or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 (detecting means) according to the position of the movable member 906a of the movable part driving mechanism 906 ( Figure 7
4-see FIG. 77). When the blade member 914a of the big winning opening splash portion 914 is closed,
A game ball that has flowed down the upper left channel 902a or the upper right channel 902b enters the lower right channel 902d.

The movable part driving mechanism 906 includes a movable member 906a, a lever solenoid 906b (86b) (first driving means) serving as a driving source for driving the movable member 906a, and a lever solenoid 906
Lever 9 that converts the force in the longitudinal direction of the shaft portion b into the force in the lateral direction and transmits it to the movable member 906a.
06c (first link mechanism). In addition, the movable part driving mechanism 906 has a lever 906
The partitioning portion 906d arranged to the left of c, and the branching portion 9 arranged further to the left of the partitioning portion 906d
06e, and a support portion 906f arranged below the branch portion 906e. Branch 906
A gap portion 906g is formed between e and the support portion 906f, and a specific area switch 72 is inserted in the gap portion 906g from the front, and a remaining ball outlet switch 73 is inserted from the rear (Fig. 75). , see FIG. 77).

As will be described later, the branch portion 906e has an inclined surface 915 (front upper end surface) that inclines forward, and can send game balls that have passed through the big winning opening switch 43 to the specific area 86 ahead. (See Figures 75 and 77). A first inflow path 917 (FIGS. 75 and 77) for inflowing game balls into the specific area 86 is formed from the opening of the big winning port switch 43 to the flow path on the inclined surface 915 . Further, the branch portion 906e has a rear upper end surface 916 that is slightly inclined rearward on the rear side of the inclined surface 915. As shown in FIG. Formed on the rear upper end surface 916 is a second inflow path 918 (FIGS. 75 and 77) that allows game balls to flow into the remaining ball outlet switch 73 (detection means).

The movable member 906a is arranged above the branch portion 906e in the normal position (initial position), and does not exist above the branch portion 906e when retracted to the right side of the partition portion 906d and moved to the operating position. When the movable member 906a is in the normal position above the branch portion 906e, the game ball is obstructed by the movable member 906a and cannot enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915,
Enter the second inflow path 918 (see FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the movable member 906a is not above the branch 906e, the game ball can enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915 without being obstructed by the movable member 906a ( See Figure 77). In this manner, the movable member 906 a is arranged at the branch position of the second inflow path 918 within the first inflow path 917 . In this embodiment, the branch position, ie, the position of the tip portion (or its vicinity) of the movable member 906a in the normal position is below the opening of the big winning opening switch 43, but it is not limited to this.

The general winning hole discharge unit 908 is provided with a magnetic sensor 908a as part of a plurality of magnetic sensor switches 61 (FIG. 79) for fraud detection. The magnetic sensor switch 61 is
The insertion hole 902e of the large-scale unit base 902 is penetrated, and the large-scale unit base 902
It is possible to detect fraudulent use of a magnet to the big winning opening 902h.

In addition, the general winning hole discharge unit 908 has a winning hole switch mounting portion 908c to which the winning hole switch 35a is mounted, and the winning hole switch 35a is provided on the upper part of the front plate 908d. The general winning opening discharge unit 908 has a general winning opening discharge passage 908b for discharging game balls.
, and the game ball that has passed through the winning opening switch 35a flows down along the front plate 908d and passes through the general winning opening discharge passage 908b from the entrance 908e. In addition, the Oiri unit base 90
2 and the front plate 908 of the general winning port discharge unit 908
d forms the flow path of the game ball.

In addition, the front plate 908d of the general prize winning outlet discharge unit 908 is provided substantially to the right of the LED board 904a of the intermediate member 904. As shown in FIG. General winning outlet discharge passage 9 of general winning outlet discharge unit 908
08 b is provided substantially above the lever solenoid 906 b ( 86 b ) of the movable part drive mechanism 906 .

The large winning splash portion drive mechanism 910 includes a shaft hole portion 910a to which a shaft portion 914b of a large winning prize opening splash portion 914 (feather member) is attached, and a splash portion driving solenoid 910b (second driving means, large prize winning opening) as a drive source. The solenoid 39b), the plate-shaped front surface portion 910c arranged facing the rear of the LED board 904a of the intermediate member 904, and the vertical force of the spring portion drive solenoid 910b are converted into the rotational force in the board surface direction of the game board 30. and a cam mechanism 910d (second link mechanism) that converts.

The front decoration member 912 has an arc-shaped opening 912 a for maintenance, which is arranged substantially in front of the big winning opening splash portion 914 . A rod-shaped object can be inserted into the arcuate opening 912a, and ball clogging (ball biting) by the blade member 914a of the big winning opening splash portion 914 can be eliminated. The front decoration member 912 is arranged inside the rectangular passage frame 902k of the large-entry unit base 902 so that the player can visually recognize the passage of the game ball through the opening of the specific area switch 72 (corresponding to the specific area 86). Although the portion corresponding to is at least transparent, only the portion may be transparent or the entirety may be transparent. As for the front decoration member 912, a translucent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 76) may be attached to a portion corresponding to the inside of the rectangular parallelepiped of the passage frame 902k as described above.

The big winning prize opening splash portion 914 includes a blade member 914a that opens and closes the big winning prize opening 902h, a shaft portion 914b that connects to the shaft hole portion 910a of the big winning prize portion drive mechanism 910, and the big winning prize unit base 90.
and a guide 914c that moves along two guide holes 902j. As described above, the shaft portion 914b extends through the through hole 902i of the large input unit base 902 and the through hole 9 of the intermediate member 904.
04b to connect to the shaft hole portion 910a. Further, the blade member 914a rotates in the board surface direction of the game board 30 with the shaft portion 914b extending in the front-rear direction as the rotation axis.

[Operation of large entry spring part drive mechanism]
Figure 73A is a perspective view showing the operation of the large winning splash section drive mechanism 910 of the large winning opening unit 800, Figure 73A (a) shows the initial state, and Figure 73A (b) shows the V switch or remaining ball switch. Each shows a possible winning state (a winning possible state to the big winning opening switch 43 (39a)).

As shown in FIG. 73A , the spring portion drive solenoid 9 that constitutes the large entry spring portion drive mechanism 910
Reference numeral 10b vertically moves a rod 910e extending in the vertical direction with the vertical direction as the driving direction. The fly portion driving solenoid 910b maintains the state in which the rod 910e is extended downward when not driven as shown in FIG. 73A(a), and pulls it upward when driven as shown in FIG. 73A(b). The wing portion drive solenoid 910b has an urging spring (not shown) inside. Then, the rod 91 is driven by a driving force stronger than the urging force.
Pull 0e upwards.

The cam mechanism 910d includes a cam 910f that rotates the shaft hole portion 910a coaxially with the shaft portion 914b.
a connecting portion 910h having a slide hole 910i extending in the left-right direction at a position facing the cam 910f and connected to the tip of the rod 910e;
h and a rod 910g extending into the slide hole 910i. The rod 910g is in rolling contact with the upper inner wall and the lower inner wall of the slide hole 910i.
It is movable in the horizontal direction with respect to 0i.

The cam 910f is shown in FIG. 73A(a) in its longitudinal direction (the radial direction of the shaft portion 914b).
is arranged at an angle (for example, 45 degrees) inclined downward, and in FIG. 73A(b), its longitudinal direction is arranged at an angle (for example, 45 degrees) inclined upward. Therefore, when the fly portion driving solenoid 910b is driven, the cam 910f is moved to the connection portion 9 via the rod 910g.
10h and is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 90 degrees) from a downwardly inclined angle to an upwardly inclined angle. At this time, the blade member 914a also rotates at the same rotation angle as the cam 910f.

At this time, the rod 910g rotates in accordance with the rotation of the cam 910f and slides through the slide hole 91.
Move left and right with respect to 0i. More specifically, when the cam 910f starts to rotate from the initial position shown in FIG. 73A(a), the rod 910g is laterally displaced with respect to the slide hole 910i according to the lateral displacement (cosine component) of the cam 910f. The displacement of the rod 910g becomes maximum when the longitudinal direction of the cam 910f becomes horizontal. Then, as it is, the cam 910
As f continues to rotate, the displacement of rod 910g decreases, and when reaching the maximum rotation position shown in FIG. 73A(b), rod 910g returns to its original position.

As described above, the blade driving solenoid 910b has its driving direction in the vertical direction. As a result, vibrations and impacts from the front direction will cause the spring portion drive solenoid 910b (rod 9
10e) is not displaced to rotate the blade member 914a, and the large-entry spring portion driving mechanism 910 is strong against vibration and impact.

If the lateral displacement of the rod 910g when the cam 910f rotates is small and the blade portion driving solenoid 910b can allow the displacement, the rod 910g and the slide hole 9
10i may be omitted and the cam 910f may be pin-connected to the connecting portion 910h.

[Operation of movable part drive mechanism]
FIG. 73B is a plan view of the movable part drive mechanism 906 of the big winning slot unit 800, and FIG.
FIG. 73B(a) shows the remaining ball switch entry possible state (initial state), and FIG. 73B(b) shows the V switch entry possible state (winning possible state).

As shown in FIG. 73B, a lever solenoid 906b (
86b) moves a rod 906k extending in the front-rear direction with the front-rear direction as the driving direction. When the lever solenoid 906b is not driven as shown in FIG. 73B(a), the rod 9
06k is maintained in a state of being extended forward, and is pulled backward during the driving shown in FIG. 73B(b). The lever solenoid 906b has a biasing spring (not shown) inside, and the lever solenoid 906b
When the driving of 06b is stopped, the rod 906k is extended forward by the biasing force of the biasing spring (not shown).

In this way, by setting the driving direction of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) constituting the movable part driving mechanism 906 to the front-rear direction, it is possible to ensure a visible area for game balls on the front surface of the large-in unit base 902. A connecting portion 906m is provided at the tip of the rod 906k.
are placed.

The movable member 906a has an insertion hole 906n (FIGS. 75 and 77) following the outer shape of its cross section.
is inserted into the partition portion 906d provided with the longitudinal direction thereof is movable in the left-right direction. As a result, the movable member 906a is not displaced due to vibration, impact, or the like from the front direction.
The movable member 906a is resistant to vibration and impact. In addition, the movable member 906a is shown in FIG. 73B(a).
In the initial state (normal position, initial position) shown in FIG. The tip portion is designed to be inserted into the insertion hole 906n.

The lever 906c has a pin coupling portion 906h that is pin coupled to the main body of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 with the vertical direction as an axis. The lever 906c extends from the pin coupling portion 906h to the movable member 90.
6a, and a second arm 906j extending from the pin coupling portion 906h toward the connecting portion 906m. have.

Although not shown, a slide hole (similar to the slide hole 910i) having an opening extending in the front-rear direction is provided at a position overlapping the first arm 906i of the movable member 906a in the vertical direction. is provided with a rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole. Similarly, a slide hole (
The second arm 906j is provided with a rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole at a position facing the slide hole.

Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state shown in FIG.
attracted to.

At this time, the second arm 906j receives a force pulled backward from the connecting portion 906m via a rod (not shown) connected to the second arm 906j.
A slide hole (not shown) of the connecting portion 906m allows for lateral movement. Therefore, the second arm 906j is rotatable about the pin coupling portion 906h, and can transmit the rotational force accompanying the rotation to the first arm 906i.

The rod (
(not shown) can transmit the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a. . Therefore, the first arm 906i can transmit the lateral component of the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a with almost no resistance.

Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B(a), the lever 906c rotates about the pin coupling portion 906h, and as shown in FIG. 73B(b), the movable member 906a is inserted. It can be moved in a direction to retract into the hole 906n. In this state, when the drive of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is stopped, the rod 9
06k and the connecting portion 906m are extended forward and the lever 906c rotates in the opposite direction,
The movable member 906a can be moved in a direction to extend from the insertion hole 906n to the branch portion 906e.

Note that when the lever 906c rotates, the longitudinal displacement of the first arm 906i is small,
If the movable member 906a can allow the displacement, the first arm 906i may be pin-coupled to the movable member. Similarly, when the lateral displacement of the second arm 906j is small and the lever solenoid 906b (86) can tolerate the displacement, the second arm 906j is connected to the connection portion 9
06m may be pinned.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the movable part drive mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 906b (8
6b)) moves the movable member 906a to the operating position outside the first inflow path 917 . As a result, the movable member 906a is always activated when the driving of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is stopped.
is arranged at the normal position in the first inflow path 917, it is possible to avoid the game ball from unexpectedly entering the specific area switch 72.例文帳に追加

Here, the branch portion 906e (specific region 86) has a width (width in the left-right direction) that is about the diameter of the game ball and allows the game ball to pass through (see FIG. 74). Therefore, the lever solenoid 90
6b (FIG. 73B(b)), the movable member 906a is at least the insertion hole 90
It is necessary to be in a state of being almost accommodated to the right of 6n (a state of being removed from the first inflow path 917).

On the other hand, when the lever solenoid 906b is stopped (FIG. 73B(a)), the movable member 90
If the distance between the tip of the left side (branch part 906e side) of 6a and the left end part of the branch part 906e (which becomes the bottleneck width to the specific area 86) is at least smaller than the diameter of the game ball,
It is possible to block the inflow of the game ball into the specific area 86 (the first inflow path 917).

Therefore, it is preferable that the moving amount of the movable member 906a is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, for example, about the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 74). As a result, the lever solenoid 90
6b can be shortened, power consumption of the lever solenoid 906b can be reduced.

It should be noted that the shape of the large winning opening unit 800 including the movable member 906a may be a shape that is left-right reversed when viewed from the front direction. In this case, the movable member 906a moves leftward when the large-entry spring portion driving mechanism 910 is driven, and is arranged outside the first inflow path, and the large-entry spring portion driving mechanism 9
10 is stopped, the movable member 906a moves rightward and is arranged in the first inflow path 917. As shown in FIG.

[Inflow route of game balls in the big prize opening unit]
FIG. 74 is a front view of the big winning hole unit 800, showing a V-switch entry prohibited state. 75 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 74. FIG. FIG. 76 shows a large winning opening unit 800
It is a front view of , showing a state in which a V-switch can be entered. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 76. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the big winning unit base 902 includes an upper left channel 902a, an upper right channel 902b, and a general winning port 35 as channels into which game balls flow. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 35 as described above passes through the winning opening switch 35a and is discharged to the outside from the general winning opening discharge passage 908b (FIGS. 72 and 75).

At the confluence position of the upper left channel 902a and the upper right channel 902b of the main entrance unit base 902,
A blade member 914a is arranged. The blade member 914a (broken line) closes the big winning opening 902h in the initial state (for example, normal game state). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the upper left channel 902a or the upper right channel 902b does not enter the big winning opening 902h, and the lower right channel 90
2d and discharged to the outside.

On the other hand, as described above, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is a special result (big hit), or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game is a special result (big hit, small hit), the blade member 914a (solid line) rotates to open the large winning opening 902h for a predetermined time, and the game ball enters a state in which it is possible to win the large winning opening 902h.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, the path of the game ball that has won the big winning hole 902h is to flow down along the inclined surface of the blade member 914a, flow into the big winning hole switch 43 (39a), and enter the big winning hole switch 43 (39a). 43 (39a), it reaches the branch 906e, flows down along the inclined surface 915 inclined forward of the branch 906e, flows into the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), and flows into the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86). A first inflow path 91 that passes through 72 and discharges to the outside
There are 7.

In addition, as another route, a movable member 906a arranged between the big winning port switch 43 (39a) and the branching portion 906e branches from the first inflow route 917, and an inclined surface 906p is inclined rearward of the movable member 906a. And a second inflow path 918 that flows down along the rear upper end face 916 and flows into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, passes the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 and is discharged to the outside.
There is

The first inflow path 917 is arranged so as to face the front from the branch point with the second inflow path 918, and the specific area switch 72 (the specific area 86) is arranged at a position facing the front. Thereby, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be ensured.

In the initial state shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the movable member 906a is extended onto the branch portion 906e. At this time, the opening of the big winning opening switch 43 (39a) through which the game ball passes faces the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a when viewed from above. Therefore, the big winning opening switch 4
3 (39a), the game ball comes into contact with the movable member 906a and is introduced into the second inflow path 918, flows down to the rear upper end surface 916 along the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a, and pushes the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. will pass through.

In the driving state shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the movable member 906a is not arranged on the branch portion 906e. At this time, most of the opening through which the game ball passes of the big winning opening switch 43 (39a) faces the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e. Therefore, the big winning opening switch 43 (
39a), the game ball that has passed through the branch portion 906e remains in the first inflow path 917, flows down along the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e, and passes through the specific area switch 72.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, the movable member 906a has a chevron-shaped (or triangular) cross-sectional shape (shape viewed from the left-right direction), and one side of the movable member 906a is a slanted surface that is slanted backward. 906p. Thereby, the movable member 906a can be formed in a simple shape. The insertion hole 906n is opened in a shape that follows the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a. As a result, rattling during operation of the movable member 906a can be reduced.

By the way, the movable part driving mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 9
06b (86b)), and a large-entry splash section drive mechanism 910 that drives the large-scale prize mouth splash section 914
(The splash portion drive solenoid 910b (39b)) is controlled by the game control device 100 (see FIG. 79). Then, the game control device 100 synchronizes the drive of the movable part drive mechanism 906 with the drive of the big entry spring part drive mechanism 910 . Specifically, when a specific type of jackpot (variable probability jackpot, etc.) is won with a predetermined probability, in the jackpot round of a predetermined time (for example, the first time), the big hit splash portion driving mechanism 910 is driven and movable Part drive mechanism 90
6 is driven (see the fifth embodiment). In this case, the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is driven at the same time as the large-entry spring portion driving mechanism 910 is driven, or the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is driven immediately before the large-entry spring portion driving mechanism 910 is driven.

As a result, since the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is not driven after the big winning splash portion driving mechanism 910 is driven, the movable member 906a is driven at the timing when the game ball passing through the big winning opening 902h passes through the movable member 906a. As a result, the problem that the movable member 906a bites the game ball can be avoided.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the LED board 902m
, but is positioned on the right side of the specific area 86 . Accordingly, the visibility of the specific region 86 is not impaired by the LED board 902m. Also LED
Since the substrate 902m is not arranged on the back surface (rear side) of the specific area switch 72, L
The ED board 902m does not hinder passage of game balls to the specific area switch 72 either.

In addition, in the special winning port unit 800, the mounting position (first inflow path 917) of the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86) and the mounting position (second inflow path 918) of the remaining ball outlet switch 73 may be exchanged. . In this case, when the movable part driving mechanism 906 is driven, the movable member 906a is arranged in the first inflow path 917 and the game ball flows into the specific area switch 72, and when the driving of the movable part driving mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member 906a is the first inflow path 91
7 and the game balls flow into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 . As a result, the gaming machine 1
0 can be easily changed.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 provided with the specific area 86 into which game balls can flow in the special game state that occurs when the result of the game (variation display game) is a special result, Detecting means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through a region that can enter in a special game state and is different from a specific region 86 (specific region switch 72); and a movable member 906a arranged upstream of the specific region 86 (specific region switch 72) and the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and the movable member 906a moves in the left-right direction. By operating in one direction, game balls can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), and by operating the movable member 906a in the other horizontal direction, detection means (remaining ball outlet switch 73) It is characterized in that game balls can flow into.

In a conventional gaming machine, there is a movable member that operates in the front-rear direction to cause game balls to flow into a specific area (specific area 86). When vibration or impact is applied to the movable member from the front of the game machine, the movable member may be displaced at an unintended timing, causing game balls to flow into a specific area. On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide detection means for detecting vibrations, impacts, etc. (fraud) from the front of the game machine, but this is costly. Furthermore, by moving the movable member in the forward and backward direction, it becomes easier to visually recognize that it has passed through a specific area (V switch), but it becomes weak against vibrations and shocks from the front of the game machine, making it vulnerable to cheating. machine.

However, since the moving direction of the movable member 906a is the left-right direction, the movable member 906a is not displaced by vibrations or shocks from the front direction, and is resistant to vibrations and shocks. Therefore, by avoiding unintended displacement of movable member 906a, movable member 906
The game machine 10 is resistant to fraudulent acts against a.

In the fourth embodiment, a first inflow path 917 is provided to allow game balls to flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), and the movable member 906a moves in one direction to move the first inflow path 917.
By being placed outside, the game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), and by operating in the other direction and being placed in the first inflow path 917, the detection means (remaining ball discharge port It is characterized in that a game ball can flow into the switch 73). As a result, the movable member 906a
It is possible to change the inflow destination of the game ball by a simple operation.

In the fourth embodiment, a second inflow path 918 is provided which branches from the middle of the first inflow path 917 and allows game balls to flow into the detection means (remaining ball outlet switch 73), and the movable member 906a is the first inflow path. Arranged at a branch position with the second inflow path 918 in 917, it is possible to flow the game ball into the first inflow path 917 by operating in one direction and being arranged outside the first inflow path 917, and in the other direction , the game ball is placed in the first inflow path 917 by operating to the first inflow path 9
17 to the second inflow path 918 (path formed by the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a). As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball can be reliably changed by a simple operation of the movable member 906a.

The fourth embodiment is characterized in that the first inflow path 917 is arranged so as to face the front side of the gaming machine 10 from the branch position (with the second inflow path 918). Thereby, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be ensured.

The fourth embodiment is characterized in that the upper surface of the movable member 906a is provided with an inclined surface 906p inclined toward the second inflow path 918. As shown in FIG. As a result, the movable member 90 can be moved with a simple configuration.
A game ball can be made to flow into the second inflow path 918 from 6a.

In the fourth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a is triangular or chevron-shaped, and is characterized by having sides related to the inclined surface 906p. Thereby, the movable member 906a can be constructed with a simple shape.

In the fourth embodiment, a first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) for operating (driving) the movable member 906a is provided, and the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) drives the movable member 906a. It is characterized by moving out of the first inflow path 917 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unexpectedly flowing into the specific area 86 (the specific area switch 72).

In the fourth embodiment, the driving direction of the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) is the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine 10, and the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) applies force in the longitudinal direction to the left and right. It is characterized in that it is connected to the movable member 906a via a first link mechanism (lever 906c) that converts force in a direction. As a result, for example, the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 90
6) It is possible to secure a visible area for the game balls placed in front of (the front of the big winning opening unit 800).

In the fourth embodiment, the width of the first inflow path 917 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball and is large enough for the game ball to flow through, and the moving length of the movable member 906a is greater than the diameter of the game ball. is also short. By shortening the driving length (stroke length) of the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906), power consumption and driving time (moving time of movable member 906a) can be reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, (when the mounting positions of the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) are exchanged), the game ball is detected by the detection means (
It has a first inflow path 917 for flowing into the remaining ball outlet switch 73), and the movable member 906a
operates in one direction and is arranged outside the first inflow path 917 so that the game ball can flow into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and operates in the other direction to the first inflow path 917 It is characterized in that game balls can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by being arranged inside. Thereby, the game mode of the gaming machine 10 can be easily changed.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special game state, a feather member (large winning opening splash portion 914) that rotates in the board surface direction of the gaming machine 10 so as to introduce the game ball into the first inflow path 917, and a feather member (
A second driving means (large winning splash portion driving mechanism 910) for rotating the big winning opening splash portion 914), and the driving direction of the second driving means (large winning splash portion driving mechanism 910) , and the second drive means (large-entry spring portion drive mechanism 910) converts the force in the vertical direction into rotational force in the direction of the board surface via the second link mechanism (cam mechanism 910d). Winning mouth splash part 91
4). As a result, the second drive means (large-entry splash section drive mechanism 910) and the blade member (large-scale winning opening splash section 914) do not displace due to vibrations or impacts from the front surface, preventing fraud from the outside. can be avoided.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special game state, a feather member (large winning opening splash portion 914) that rotates in the board surface direction of the gaming machine 10 so as to introduce the game ball into the first inflow path 917, and a feather member (
Second driving means (large winning opening splash portion 914) to rotate (large winning splash portion driving mechanism 910), first driving means (movable portion driving mechanism 906) and second driving means (large winning splash portion driving mechanism 910 ), and the game control means (game control device 100) drives the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) to the second drive means (large entry It is characterized by synchronizing with the driving of the fly portion driving mechanism 910).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable portion driving mechanism 906 from being driven after the big winning splash portion driving mechanism 910 is driven, and the game ball that has passed through the big winning opening 902h
It is possible to avoid the problem that the movable member 906a is driven at the timing of passing a and the movable member 906a bites the game ball.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and the housing (large entry unit base 90
2, an intermediate member 904 and a general winning outlet discharge unit 908 are combined), and the housing is
General winning port 35 and distribution route of game balls that have won the general winning port 35 (general winning port discharge passage 90
8b). As a result, the whole unit is downsized and the game area 32
can reduce the occupied area (volume) for

In the fourth embodiment, the special winning opening unit 800 may be associated with the effects described in the second embodiment. 78 is a front view of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG.
It is a diagram when transitioning from the state shown in 1 to the special game state. As shown in FIG. 78, the variable probability state (
When a big win (special game state) occurs from a state where a small win rush can occur), as shown in FIG. can be displayed. Arrow image 619a is, for example,
It has an arrow shape extending toward the large winning opening unit 800 (V-attacker) with the position overlapping the virtual line 822 as the base end, and pointing to the large winning opening unit 800 (V attacker) at the tip. Further, in conjunction with the display of the arrow image 619a, it is possible to display promotion information 619b composed of, for example, the words "Aim". The promotion information 619b is displayed at substantially the same position as the effect image 617, for example. By displaying in this manner, the object to be watched by the player when shifting from the variable probability state to the special game state is switched from the large winning opening unit 806 to the large winning opening unit 800, and the player gazes at the variable probability state. The large winning mouth unit 800 (V
Attacker) is displayed, so that the player does not miss these displays and can easily recognize that the instruction "Aim for the big winning unit 800 (V attacker)" is given.

In FIG. 78, a specific type of jackpot (such as a variable probability jackpot) has occurred, and even after the special game state ends, the variable probability state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur) is entered, so the mode display unit 674 (
The first suggestion information) is left in the "tiger mode" so as to inform the variable probability state (small hit rush) after the end of the special game state. That is, in FIG. 78, the mode display section 674 (first suggestive information) continues to display the effect mode related to the "tiger mode" even after shifting from the variable probability state to the special game state. In addition, if the variable probability state does not occur after the end of the special game state, or regardless of the game state after the end of the special game state, the display of "tiger mode" is erased and "tiger mode" is displayed at the time of the transition. Arbitrary words, such as "Tiger Bonus", may be displayed at the position to notify that the game is in the special game state.

It should be noted that the effect by the arrow image 619a and the promotion information 619b in FIG. 78 is effective when V winning occurs immediately after the start of the special game state.
It is preferable to drive the movable member 906a so as to enable winning. However, it is not limited to this, and the movable member 906a may be driven in rounds other than the first big win round.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 111. FIG. 5th Embodiment is related with the structure of the game control apparatus 100, the detail of its game control, and the structure of the production|presentation control apparatus 300, and the detail of its production|presentation control. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device]
FIG. 79 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. A game machine 10 is a game control device 1
00 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111.
, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions is configured. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 or adjacent to the game control device 100, so that the front frame 12 (
It is placed in a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the main body frame is opened.
That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability setting values can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed as follows. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work set values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability set values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work set values and probability set values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and normal reach (N reach), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach.
The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. A random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining pattern random numbers and variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Switch 36a, starter 2 switch 37a in second starter winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
, and is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . Specific area switch 72
detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls passing through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Switch 63, a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of game machine 10
5 is input.

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal from 12 and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 . The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output section 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b that operates a lever and opens a specific area 86 for outputting open/close data. Two output ports 134 are provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives an opening/closing data signal for the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc., generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, and a current supply for the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b for outputting an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the side, and a third driver for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. A fourth terminal for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
Driver 138d is supplied with 12V DC to provide a 12V level to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 etc.
can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings).

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls),
Number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described using FIG. FIG. 80 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command from the game microcomputer 111 , determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video,
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which voice data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 19a and 19b provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speakers 19c and 19d provided on the front frame 12. , sound source LSI
The sound generated in 314 is output from the upper speakers 19a, 19b and the lower speakers 19c, 19d via an amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built into the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and a cross key 6 provided on the surface of the production button 25.
90f, the function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44 and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the production A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the normal pattern display device, the normal pattern variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the normal pattern display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the effect state, the sound output from the speakers 19a-19d, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the general electricity support (electricity support) is performed by duplicating the time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time)
to a second variable display time that is shorter than the normal first variable display time (eg, 10000 msec becomes 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern stop time to display the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is the first
A second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so as not to open 7b (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the transition state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, there are four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state,
setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 82B and FIG. 84).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 82B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 84).

When the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, transition to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode);
AM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 82B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B.
and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 82A and 82B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100,
The sign (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 82A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

If the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (result of A1008 is "N")
, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Activate the circuit (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
For U111a, there is provided a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a random number update trigger that is supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 100, RAM (here RAM111c) indicating the abnormality of RA
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), the checksum for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, indicating that the RAM is abnormal.
Clear the abnormal flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 uses the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 resets the RAM (RAM
111c) is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-Probability setting confirmation process in A1037 (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046 are executed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023
result is "Y"), a command of main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024)
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
0 anomaly is reported.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 controls the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop on the performance display device 152.
0 is output (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). In addition, here, the information about the jackpot is stored in the RAM
111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are kept off. After that, repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and wait,
Once again, the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is performed, and the power is turned on. Note that while the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001
), the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 83) capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing cannot be executed, so the game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be performed.

In this way, setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though the two ON operations are not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024 to A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data ("E1" error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and security signal ON data is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. Then steps A1025 and A10
26 is repeated and waited.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
”), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value “1”), and then (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
'), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the production control device 30
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting informs that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 84) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 83) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (A1036
(A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), step A1055-A1
061 is executed when a power failure occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036
The result is "Y"), prohibits the interruption (A1038), and transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
041 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on (power recovery) processing is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirming flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), step A10
47 is processed.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Further, the RAM initialization command and the power failure recovery command include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information that is information on the probability set value (set value) of the game machine 10. be The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and RAM
Notification of initialization (RAM clearing) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting)
, is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small hit design random number that determines the small hit design (small hit design initial value random number), initial value of hit random number that determines the hit of the general pattern (hit initial value random number) , the initial value of the drop lottery random number used in the drop lottery (the initial value of the drop lottery random number, etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as the start value (A1048), and the interrupt is permitted (A10).
49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. there is however,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same period (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the winning pattern random number, and the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. In other words, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 83) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

If the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130
4 is "N"), and based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), further random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower special winning port switch 38a, and the upper special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of errors. (Whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) Winning hole switch/status monitoring processing is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1317 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
, a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game processing for performing the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game processing for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game is performed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1316).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process is executed to monitor abnormal ejection from the big winning opening (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device 38, 39 large winning opening switch 43 (lower large winning opening switch 38a, upper large winning opening switch 39a), specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch, V switch), residual Based on the input from the ball discharge port switch 73, abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through the big winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is the specific area switch 7 .
2 (V winning port switch, V switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y"), set the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the external information terminal 71 outputs ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (game hall internal control device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality.
(A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
result is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407
result is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after turning on the power (A240
8 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112, the game control device 100 (A2409
result is "Y"), the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability set value area corresponding to the work set value The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. The probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
”), a value corresponding to the work set value in the work set value area may be stored in the probability set value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs while changing settings (A1037
result is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. can be prevented from being changed by an unintended value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring a hard random number as a jackpot random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting prize (A
If the result of 2703 is "N"), the processing moves to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703
The result is "Y"), whether the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is low probability and no time saving (no state support), that is, special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that it is during the special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state). And if it is in a low probability state and no time saving state (the result of A2704 is "Y"
), that is, in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

The game control device 100, when the probability of occurrence of a big hit is not in a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when it is in a time saving state (state with general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N"), A right hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300, when there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state, displays the right hitting instruction display as a warning to instruct the right hitting display device 41 can be displayed in Incidentally, in the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning to the first start winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708 ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100, the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2)
A starting gate 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring the winning of the game is prepared (A2709), and a hardware random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a jackpot random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start-up prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no starting point winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting point switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting entrance winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (A271
If the result of 1 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in operation (normal electric operation) (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "
N"), and it is determined whether or not fraud (general and electrical fraud) is occurring with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that the general electrical fraud is occurring. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 37
is occurring (result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2
The result of 713 is "N"), prepare a table for setting information on hold due to winning to normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2714), execute special figure starting port switch common processing (A
2715), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when fraud is occurring to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2
712 is "Y"), the processing of steps A2714 and A2715 is executed without executing the processing of step A2713.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing (A270
8, A2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure start opening switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common processing is the starting port 1 switch 36
This processing is performed in common for each input when there is an input from a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for lottery for falling from a high probability state of a special figure to a low probability state (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. Save in area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is not achieved (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, if it is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), extract the small hit pattern random number and prepare it (A
2915), and save in the RWM's small winning symbol random number storage area (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2917), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2
918). Then, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2919), production command setting processing (A292
0) is executed to end the special figure start opening switch common processing. The decoration special figure reservation number command is
In the starting port 1 switch 36a, it is a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, and the starting port 2 switch 37a
Then, it is a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command.

Special figure reservation information determination processing (A2918) is the first start winning port 36 and normal fluctuation winning device 37
It is executed for the special figures 1 and 2 start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to. In the special figure reservation information determination process, the execution information (including the stop symbol information) of the special figure variation display game is determined before the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 1 and 2 start memory is executed. Processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed. In addition, in the special figure reservation information determination process, the target start switch and the low probability corresponding to the determined stop design information prefetching stop design command (low probability) and / or high probability for prefetching stop design command (high probability) is prepared as a performance command, a read-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number (determined one) indicating a variation mode of a special figure variation display game is prepared as a performance command, and performance command setting processing is executed.
In addition, in the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a long fluctuation (long fluctuation) and is often forced to end due to the result of losing, so as not to waste the special figure 2 fluctuation display game It is not necessary to execute pre-reading processing (pre-determination processing).

In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives both the prefetching stop symbol command (low probability) and the prefetching stop symbol command (high probability), if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the prefetching stop symbol Use commands (low probability) to execute prefetch pattern command processing,
If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, the prefetching stop symbol command (high probability) may be used to execute the prefetching symbol system command processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. again,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 game processing.

The game control device 100 first displays a special figure 1 indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted.
It is determined whether or not the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 wins the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is determined whether it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). If neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A3202 is "N"),
A big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process,
The detection of game balls by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Then, specific area switch specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
subtract 1) (A3205). The special figure 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (the result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203 and A32
04 is skipped, and step A3205 is processed. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the game control device 100
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Furthermore, the special figure 1 game sequence branch table is used to acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed by the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 1 game processing number (A3209).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A3209, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure 1 fluctuation Special figure 1 Normal processing is executed (A3210). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A3209, the game control device 100
The setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the processing during the special figure 1 fluctuation which performs the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display are executed (A3211). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A3209, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the jackpot fanfare command is set according to the jackpot type, the fanfare time is set according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. To perform the setting of the information necessary for performing special figure 1 display during processing is executed (A3212).

In the special figure 1 display process, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a winning pattern command corresponding to the big winning pattern is loaded from the winning pattern command area and prepared as a production command, and a big winning fanfare is performed. A command is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Subsequently, the big win fanfare time corresponding to the big winning hole opening information is set, and the big win fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Then, set "3" as the processing number to shift to fanfare / interval processing, save the special low probability & no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area, and normal game mode in the normal game mode flag area Save no time saving flag. If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss, set "0" as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal process to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and process it in the special figure 1 game processing number area save the number.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3209, the game control device 100
A fanfare/interval process for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A3213). Details of the fanfare/during interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3209, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A3214).

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3209, the game control device 100
A process of setting the interval time and the ending time, and a big winning hole remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process are executed (A3215).

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3209, the game control device 100
A special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) is set, and special figure 1 jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing special figure 1 normal processing is executed (A3216).

In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, if the time reduction determination data (described later) set at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is data without time saving, after the jackpot ends, in order to shift to the normal game state A jackpot end setting process 1 is executed, and when the time reduction determination data is data indicating that there is a reduction in working hours, a jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to a time saving state after the jackpot ends. However, when there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), in order to shift to the probability variable state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit, the jackpot end setting process 3 to run. Furthermore, in the special figure 1 jackpot end process, "0" is set as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

In addition, in the case of a variable probability big hit that becomes a variable probability state after the end of the big win, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time, and the specific area switch 72
reliably detects the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning).

In the jackpot end setting process 1, the general pattern without time saving flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area. Normal figure time saving no flag indicates that it is not a time reduction variation state (time saving state, general electricity support state) of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and it is not a time saving state (universal electric support state). After that, the game control device 100 clears the time shortening variation count region to 0.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, the general pattern time saving flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area. There is a normal figure time saving flag indicates that it is a time reduction variation state (time saving state, general electricity support state) of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The special low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and the time saving state (universal electric support state). Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in a time-reduction variation count area that stores the time-reduction variation count.

In the jackpot end setting process 3, the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high and the time saving state (here, the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is executed).

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A3217), special figure 1 display The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86
Executes lever solenoid control processing for controlling b (A3219), and ends the special figure 1 game processing.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs step A32.
Special figure 1 for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 without performing the processing from 02 to A3216
After preparing the variation control table (A3217), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is performed (A3219), and the special figure 1 End game processing. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted, the timing (renewal) of the variation time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. It should be noted that, in the special figure 1 display device 51, the special symbol variation itself may be seemingly continued by the symbol variation control process.

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 88A and 88B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). If it is not in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Monitor detections. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
subtract 1) (A3304). The special figure 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3301
result is "Y"), step A33 without performing steps A3302 and A3303
04 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3323.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the timer value for long fluctuations (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3308). It should be noted that, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game is a long variation, and when the variation time is long (eg, 10 minutes), the timer for the variation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308 By repeating the count of the timer value for long fluctuation by the processing of , a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is "Y") , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed by the special figure 2 game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 2 game processing number (A3311).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure 2 fluctuation Special figure 2 Normal processing is executed (A3312). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A3311, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation during processing such as the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display (A3313). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A3311, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, the jackpot fanfare command is set according to the jackpot type, the fanfare time is set according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. To perform special figure 2 display during processing to set the necessary information, etc. (A3314).

In the special figure 2 display process, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a winning pattern command corresponding to the big winning pattern is loaded from the winning pattern command area and prepared as a performance command, and a big winning fanfare is performed. A command is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Subsequently, the big win fanfare time corresponding to the big winning hole opening information is set, and the big win fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Then, "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing.

In addition, in the special figure 2 display process, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small win, the winning pattern command corresponding to the small winning pattern is loaded from the winning pattern command area and prepared as a production command, A small win fanfare command is prepared as a performance command, and performance command setting processing is executed. Then, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the small winning fanfare middle processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small winning fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. do.

Also, in the special figure 2 display process, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a loss, set "0" as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process , special figure 2
Save the transaction number in the game transaction number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A3315). It should be noted that the fanfare/during-interval processing is common to that executed within the special-figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3311, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A3316).

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3311, the game control device 100
A processing for setting the interval time and the ending time, and a big winning hole remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing are executed (A3317).

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Special figure 2 jackpot end processing for performing setting of information necessary for executing special figure 2 usual processing is executed (A3318). In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is the special figure 1 jackpot end processing "special figure 1
” is replaced with “Special Figure 2”.

If the game processing number is "7" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Small win fanfare mid-process for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting information necessary for performing the small-win mid-process is executed (A3319). In addition, in the process during the small hit fanfare, the process number "8" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower big winning opening in the special figure 2 game process timer area. save to .

If the game processing number is "8" at step A3311, the game control device 100
A process of setting a small hit end command and a process of setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process are executed (A3320).

If the game processing number is "9" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Processing for setting the ending time and small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing are executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" at step A3311, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). In addition, in the special figure 2 small hit end process, in addition to setting "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 2 normal process, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 small hit end processing, the flags of the general figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag area are maintained, and the probability state etc. do not change due to the occurrence of the small hit.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A3323), special figure 2 display The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86
Execute the lever solenoid control process for controlling b (A3325), and end the special figure 2 game process.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start to vary (A3401). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if the fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3401 is "N"), set the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number (A3416), save to special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). In addition, here, from the end of the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end processing), and the special figure 2 variation display game From the end of the small hit variation (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 2 small hit end processing), the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the variation.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (A3401
(A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command is already prepared as a production command and transmitted to the production control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction has been notified. If left-handed instruction has been notified (A34
02 result is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3406.

If the game control device 100 has not already notified the left-handed instruction based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and performs an effect command setting process. (A3404), and sets a left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 (A340
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3406)
. If the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), save the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3402). Thereby, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

Game control device 100, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the time saving state is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Subsequently, a special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, the decoration special figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as a production command (A3410), and the production command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A34
12), the effect command setting process is executed (A3413). The production control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of time reduction fluctuations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, during special figure 1 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, execute the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process, which is a process for transitioning to the special figure 1 fluctuation process (
A3415). In the special figure 1 variable process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start to vary (A3501). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not possible to start fluctuation (if the fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3501 is "N"), set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), save in special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (during special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing), the special figure 2 variation display game is changed. Not startable.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (A3501
(A3502). If the number of special figures 2 pending is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), prepare the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the presence or absence of the time saving state as a production command (A3503), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3504). Next, special figure 2
Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3506), and executes production command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes an effect command setting process. Yes (A3509
). The production control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of time reduction fluctuations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 2 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, execute the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process, which is a process for transitioning to the special figure 2 fluctuation process (
A3511). In the special figure 2 fluctuation processing transition setting process, for example, the processing number "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area.

Game control device 100, if the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (result of A3502 is "Y"),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (A3512). If the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (
The result of A3512 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is fluctuating (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (A3513). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A3513 is "N"
), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3515).
.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes effect command setting processing (A3517).
The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. - 特許庁After that, set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (A
3518), and save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Thereby, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game will be executed, so without preparing the customer waiting demo command, the special figure 2 Set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the game processing number (A3518) and save it in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Also, if Toku-zu 1 is fluctuating (A35
13 is "Y"), or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3514 is "Y")
”), without preparing a customer waiting demo command, etc., set the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and enter the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM Save (A3519).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3409) in special figure 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
In addition, the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting the variation information (including the distribution of the prefetch variation pattern). Next, load a random number from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3602a), and clear the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number 1 of the reservations) to 0 (A3603a) , a fall lottery process, which will be described later, is executed (A3604a). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 performs big hit flag 1 setting processing (
A3605a), special figure 1 stop design setting process (A
3606a), the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

In the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3606a), when the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, the stop design number corresponding to the big hit design random number is obtained, and the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number, time reduction judgment data , round number upper limit information, and big winning opening opening information are acquired and saved, and when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot, the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. After that, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed. Incidentally, the types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers are, for example, 16R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 1
There is a 6R normal jackpot (100 times of time reduction).

The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process. The round number upper limit information and the big winning opening information are
It is for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation start information setting process for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game ( A3610a) is executed. Then, a time-reduction variation count update process for updating the time-reduction variation count is executed (A3
611a).

In the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, using the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, To the variation pattern random number 1 loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number 1 on hold) of the special figure 1 Execute the sorting process based on, and prepare the second half fluctuation selection table. Subsequently, using the second half variation selection table, the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of special figure 1 (reservation number 1
Execute the sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 2 loaded from ), obtain the second half variation number, and save it in the second half variation number area. In addition, the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the table selection pointer calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number is prepared. Furthermore, the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 is executed, and the first half variation number is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area.

In the time reduction fluctuation count update process, if the special low probability & time saving flag is set in the special game mode flag area and it is in a special time saving (with a special low probability and general electricity support), time reduction The number of fluctuations is updated by -1 (subtracted by 1). In addition, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to 100 times, for example. Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the time reduction variation frequency is updated by -1. Then, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes 0, save the special low probability & no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area, save the normal figure time saving no flag in the general game mode flag area, time If the number of shortened fluctuations does not become 0, nothing is done.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "1
” (A3612a), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (ON data of signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3616a). Subsequently, save the initial value (e.g. 100 msec) of the flashing control timer (blinking period timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (A3617
a), save the initial value of the pattern number during fluctuation (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting pattern) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (A3618a), and finish the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. Figure 92 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (Fig. 91) in which the "jackpot flag 1" is replaced with the "jackpot flag 2", and the "special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description is omitted. It should be noted that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process respectively correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

In addition, in the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3606b), when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, the stop design number corresponding to the big hit design random number is acquired, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is shortened, and the time is shortened. Judgment data, round number upper limit information, and big winning opening opening information are acquired and saved, while when the big hit flag 2 is a small win, a stop pattern pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved. If the jackpot flag 2 is a loss, the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. After that, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the fall lottery process (A3604
a, A3604b) will be described in detail. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the falling lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state (variable probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). If it is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the falling lottery process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the falling lottery random number value of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value. (A3702). If the falling lottery lower limit judgment value is less than (the result of A3702 is "Y
”), and the drop lottery process ends. If it is equal to or greater than the drop lottery lower limit judgment value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the target drop lottery random number value is larger than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (result of A3703 is "Y")
, ends the drop lottery process.

If the game control device 100 is below the falling lottery upper limit judgment value (the result of A3703 is "N"
), the target drop lottery random number is between the drop lottery upper limit judgment value and the drop lottery lower limit judgment value, so the process when winning the drop lottery is started. Save in the external information output data area (A3704). where the signal for high-probability termination is
They are OFF data (OFF signal) of 2 jackpot signals and OFF data (OFF signal) of 4 jackpot signals. As a result, a signal relating to high-probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). Signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1
They are the OFF data of the fluctuation time reduction state signal and the OFF data of the special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the instruction to hit to the left in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area of RWM (A3707). Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A3708), and end the falling lottery process. The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

As described above, in the variable state (high probability of special figure), the drop lottery is executed at the start of each special variable display game, and when the drop lottery is won, the variable state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low Falling process (A3704-A3708) for falling to probability state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the RWM jackpot flag 1 area (A3801). Subsequently, a jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3802). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A3803)
.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). jackpot flag 2
is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random value,
A big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A38
05), it is determined whether or not the result of determination is a big hit (A3806). If the result of determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Only when the big win flag 2 is not a big win, the big win flag 1 can become a big win (the big win information is saved in the big win flag 1 area), so that the big win flag 1 and the big win flag 2 can be avoided at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y
”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of RWM (
A3901), save information in the RWM jackpot flag 2 area (A3902).
Subsequently, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1),
Prepare (A3903). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). jackpot flag 1
is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random value,
A big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A39
06), it is determined whether or not the result of determination is a big hit (A3907). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Only when the big win flag 1 is not a big win, the big win flag 2 can become a big win (the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area), so that the big win flag 1 and the big win flag 2 can be avoided from becoming a big win at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y
”), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), based on the acquired big hit random number, whether the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910). In addition, in this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the determination of the small hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). special figure 2
If the variable display game is a small hit (result of A3910 is "Y"), step A3901
Overwrite the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area that saved the losing information and save it (A
3911), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. When the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3805, A3906) will be described in detail. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. Incidentally, the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A4001), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A4002). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

Game control device 100, when the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A400
The result of 2 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the judgment result (A4007), and finish the big hit judgment process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A4
The result of 002 is "N"), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (A4003). And, when it is in the special figure high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in the special high probability (A
The result of 4003 is "N"), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A
4005).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the procedure of small hit determination processing. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided uniquely and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, it is also possible to provide the unique small hit random number.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of 4101 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A4102). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A
If the result of 4102 is "Y"), deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
Figure 98 (a) (b) (c) is a special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (Figure 96), small hit determination process (Figure 97) and fall lottery process (Figure 93) is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability.

In the example of FIG. 98(a), the jackpot probability in the high probability state (high probability state) is the probability setting value 1
6 (Settings 1 to 6) are the same. On the other hand, jackpot probability in low probability state (low probability state)
tends to increase as the probability set value increases (higher setting). In this manner, only one of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state may be increased as the probability set value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 96 by the value range of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the lower limit decision value or the value range of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit decision value.

Also, with settings 1 and 2, with settings 3 and 4, or with settings 5 and 6, the probability of a big hit (
High probability state) and jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. It should be noted that the jackpot probabilities may be different for all settings. Moreover, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect corresponding to each probability set value (fluctuation effect setting process to be described later).

In the example of FIG. 98(b), the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of the probability set value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 97 by the value range of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 87, in the special figure 1 variation display game, a small hit does not occur (the small hit probability is zero). In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Moreover, in a low probability state, you may make small hit probability lower than a high probability state.

In the example of FIG. 98(c), the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery is the probability set value (setting)
Regardless of whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of whether it is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game or a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is constant (1/237) be. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit judgment value and the fall lottery lower limit judgment value in FIG. 93 by the fall lottery random number value range.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the variation pattern selection information table (A4401
). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach,
The second half variation is a variation mode after reaching the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4403), and if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), To distribute the first half variation according to the number of special figure 1 reservations, add the number of special figure 1 reservations to the first half offset data and convert the value (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A4403
is "Y"), the process of step A4404 is not performed, and the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 is not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of RWM (A4405), and saves the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2).
) is saved in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process is terminated.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time saving state (state without general electric support), that is, during special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (A4501). If there is a special low probability & no time saving (A
If the result of 4501 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4505.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & short working hours (the result of A4501 is "N
”), that is, when it is in the time saving state or the definite variable state, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started from now is the time shortening final variation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time saving state. When the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is the time shortening final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A
4503). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation. .

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game to be started from now on is a high probability final fluctuation when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"). (A4505). Here, the high probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when the drop lottery (FIG. 93) is won and the probability variation state (high probability state) falls to the normal game state (low probability state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is a high probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y"), or when it is a time reduction final variation (A450
2 result is "Y"), in order to secure the time for notifying that it is the final variation, set the first half offset data and second half offset data for the final variation (A4506), and shift to the processing of step A4511. .

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the high probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "N"). A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (A450
The result of 7 is "N"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process moves to step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). Thereby, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a long fluctuation (long fluctuation).

In addition, in the probability variable state (special figure high probability state), the second half offset data for the long-term variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is not set, so the special figure 2 variation display game is normal variation time variation (long variation relatively short fluctuations). As a result, in the variable state (special figure high probability state), special figure 2
A small win rush (RUSH) state in which small wins occur frequently occurs due to the variable display game. Since the probability state does not change in the small hit, the small hit rush state where the small hit occurs frequently is
It continues from the start of the variable probability state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the big hit result). It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration that enables the state of a small hit rush even in the time saving state.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of RWM (A451
1) Save the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4512), and end the special figure 2 information setting process.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A3
610a, A3610b) will be described in detail. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation time value table (A5002), and acquires the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (A5003). Furthermore, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
6), save the added value in the target special game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5008). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (result of A5008 is "N"), special figure 2
Since the information is being set for the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

If the game control device 100 does not start the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A5009
result is "N"), save 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50
10), when starting the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5009 is "Y"),
9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to change the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough with a 2-byte timer, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions. set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds. The long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in the normal game state.

For example, 60000 ms by saving the above additional value to the special game processing timer area
If a timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and 9 more iterations are saved,
Timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2 game processing (Fig. 88)) continues to subtract the timer (A3
304), when the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and 60000 ms (60 seconds), which is the long fluctuation timer value, is set again in the game processing timer (A3308). ). As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game of long variation,
60000 msec + (60000 msec x 9) = 10 minutes long variation time.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when it is not a long fluctuation (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007 It is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (A50
08 result is "Y"), step A5012 without setting the number of repetitions of the timer
transition to

After steps A5008, A5010 and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012) and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure fluctuation Shift the contents of the random number storage area related to the display game (A5016), and clear the empty area after the shift (
A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Variation commands including information about patterns are mentioned, and these commands are sent to the production control device 300 . In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuating process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 during fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of symbol determination by +1 (A5301).
The output count of the number of design confirmations is used in the design confirmation number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the pattern confirmation number signal generated when the stop pattern of the special symbol variation display game is decided to the external device. be done. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as a production command (A5302), and the production command setting process is executed (A5
303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5
305).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the missing symbol of special figure 1.
00msec, if it is a big hit pattern of special figure 1, it is 2000msec.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is lost (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is changed to the special figure 1 stop symbol Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop pattern area (A5
322).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a win (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the game control device 100 also changes the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed).
(A5308). If special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A5308 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5319. If special figure 2 is also changing (A53
(A5
309).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is "
Y"), and the process proceeds to step A5311. If the special figure 2 display process is not running (
The result of A5309 is "N"), and the design determination number output number is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, the display time of the special figure 1 plus 4msec to the special figure 1 display time (special figure 1 display time + 4msec) is set (A5311), and the special figure 2 is displayed in the game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4msec is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game process (subtraction of 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3304), which is an extra addition. Thereby, the actual display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 2, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the missing pattern command of the decoration special figure 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the production command setting process ( A5315). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 to set for executing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, save the process number "2" in the special figure 2 game process number area,
Execute processing to stop the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with the result of losing.

Through the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, in the special figure 1 varying process which is the control related to the special figure 1 variation display game, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variation display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 2 variation), if the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a hit result (jackpot), the special figure 2 variation display game is lost. As a result, the process is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable processing, at the end of the fluctuation time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) times up (of A3206 Since the result is "Y"), when the special figure 1 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5319). Next, load the round number upper limit information from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit information area, save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5320), The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display during processing transition setting processing 1 which sets for executing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing processing is ended. In special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the processing number "2" in the special figure 1 game processing number area, executing processing to stop the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, etc. Perform necessary processing to move to processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variation display game (while the special figure 2 is varying)
Even so, when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a winning result, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figure 103 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of design determination by +1 (A5401).
The output count of the number of times of design determination is used in the design determination number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) for outputting to an external device the pattern determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined. . Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as a production command (A5402), and the production command setting process is executed (A540
3). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and an effect command setting process is executed (A540
5).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2,
Set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is a missing symbol of the special figure 2.
00 msec, 600 msec if the special figure 2 big hit pattern, 136 msec if the special figure 2 small hit pattern. In addition, the display time of the winning pattern and the big hit pattern of the special figure 2 is the same, but is longer than the display time of the small hit pattern of the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a loss (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop design Load from the save area and save in the special figure 2 stop pattern area (A5
427).

If the game control device 100 does not lose the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5407
The result is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also being executed) (A5408). If special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A5408 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5423. If Toku-zu 1 is also fluctuating (the result of A5408 is "Y
”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (A5409).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit, the game control device 100 (A540
If the result of 9 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit, set the special figure 1 game interruption flag (
A5412), prepares the decoration special figure 1 interruption command as an effect command (A5413), and executes the effect command setting process (A5414). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is running (during the special figure 1 variation), when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the special figure 1 game. Interruption is achieved by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number) is postponed, and after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is completed, the special figure 1 that was interrupted You can restart the variable display game.

The game control device 100 (A540
The result of 9 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (A54
10). If the special figure 1 displaying process is in progress (result of A5410 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5415. If the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), +1 is updated to the design fixed number of times output number (A5411). Subsequently, the value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 as the display time of special figure 1 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 msec
Set the display time of c) (A5415), and save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4 msec is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game process (subtracts only 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3205
), which is an extra addition. Thereby, the display time of the stop design of the actual special figure 2 and the display time of the stop design of the special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 1, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the winning pattern command of the decoration special figure 1 as a production command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the production command setting process ( A5419). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, special figure 1 displaying during processing shift setting processing 2 which makes the setting in order to execute processing during special figure 1 displaying is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, save the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area,
A process of stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation display game with the result of losing is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, in the special figure 2 fluctuation processing which is the control related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 fluctuation display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (the special figure 1 is changing), if the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variation display game will be forced as a result of losing. will end (execution ends).

It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation process, when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306 is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 2 variation display game of the hit result stops variation, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly ended in variation (execution end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (A5424). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern setting process (stop pattern number at the time of a small hit) is saved in the special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425),
The special prize opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 to set for executing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing process ends. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the process number "2" is entered in the special figure 2 game process number area
Or save, such as executing the processing to stop the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, perform the necessary processing to shift to the special figure 2 display processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variation display game (during special figure 1 variation)
Even so, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figures 104A and 104B show
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare/during interval processing; FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), end the fanfare/interval process.
When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (A600
2 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A6010.

If the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y
”), it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (A6003). When there is no passage of the game ball at the normal pattern starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. That is, the right-hand shot is started and the normal figure start gate 34
Until the game ball passes through the game ball, it does not shift to the processing related to the big hit (such as processing during the opening of the big winning opening).

The game control device 100 (A600
If the result of 3 is "Y"), that is, when the right hand is started, the setting of information regarding the start of the big win is executed (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number limit table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit table and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A6005). In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 16R, 8R,
2R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table and saves it in the RWM round LED pointer area (A6006). Then, in this embodiment, since the upper big prize opening is opened in the big hit, the upper big prize opening fraudulent prize number area is cleared (A6007), R
Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area of WM (A600
8), save the ON output data of the continuous operation device operating signal in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A601
0). In addition, the number of rounds in the number of rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process, so it is set to 0 before the start of this big hit operation.
Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets an initial value of the big-hit processing control pointer corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the big-hit processing control pointer area of RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeats the opening and closing of the big winning opening during one round, set 0 as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern of opening the big winning opening only once during one round, the initial value is the upper limit. Set a value (=21). In the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes, the initial value may not be 0, but may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit (that is,
start with a value in the middle). Next, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round for operating the lever solenoid 86b for opening the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A60
16). In this embodiment, the lever solenoid actuation round is jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b when it is the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "Y") (A6017). Here, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time in the case of a variable probability jackpot (for example, 16R, 8R or 2R variable probability jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (for example, a 16R normal jackpot). , the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "
4” is set (A6019), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (
A6020). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
, This process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6021), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (A6022). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6020 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the special figure 2 game processing timer for the special figure 2 game processing time Save to area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the opening of the upper grand prize opening (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the RWM grand prize opening solenoid. In the data area, save the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) ON data (A6026), clear the large winning opening count (A6027), fanfare/interval processing exit.

In the present embodiment, there is only a big win that opens only the upper big prize opening, but two types of big wins that open only the upper big prize opening and big wins that only open the lower big prize opening may be provided.
A configuration is also possible in which a big win is provided in which both the upper big prize opening and the lower big prize opening are opened.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 10
5 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 uses an RTC (real time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
38 is executed to read time information (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, when power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003 and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 replaces with RTC338, and may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any one of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, . . . ), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time in accordance with the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long time interval decreases as the set value increases. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing lots for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the cross key 690f), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. Effect button input processing is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor), the player, etc. is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. By drawing lots for the value (additional value) to be added to the performance points with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the added value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large additional value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling effect devices (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as electric accessories driven by motors and solenoids (B002
1). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0021. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
]), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 106) described above will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). It should be noted that the variation system command is a command for commanding the variation pattern of the decorative special design, there is a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process). and MODE
If the part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
(B
1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command to command the operation related to the performance during the hit (display of the fanfare screen and the round screen, etc.). (Set during interval processing), Interval command (Set during processing during opening of large winning mouth), Ending command (Set during processing during opening of large winning mouth), Small win fanfare command, Small winning open command (Small winning round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) and the like. If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a hit system command (B12
(B
1209). It should be noted that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure 1 command and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. And when the MODE part represents a pattern-based command (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), the pattern-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends. In the look-ahead design system command processing, if the latest received decoration special figure reservation number command is the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, the look-ahead design system command (look-ahead stop design command) special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number 1 Saved in the look-ahead design command area, and if the latest received decoration special figure reservation number command is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, the look-ahead design system command (look-ahead stop design command) corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number Save in the special figure 2 look-ahead pattern command area. In addition, if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the prediction stop pattern command (low probability) is used to execute the prediction pattern system command processing, and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, read ahead The stop symbol command (low probability) may be used to execute the look-ahead symbol system command process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). A look-ahead variation command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, if the MODE part indicates a read-ahead variation command (the result of B1215 is "
Y"), execute the prefetch variation command process (B1216), and terminate the received command analysis process. In the look-ahead variation command process, look-ahead lottery processing related to look-ahead effect is executed based on a look-ahead variation pattern command and a look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance eye effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) described above will be described. FIG. 108 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B1305 ). Then, when the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
05 result is "Y"), the power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, if the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B130
7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud occurrence command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state ON command, the generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part represents a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the processing when the number of out-balls is received is executed (B1
320), ending the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
If the result of 1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command for restoration from power failure in step A1046 of FIG. 82B and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, if the MODE part indicates a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a probability setting change command (A
1030). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting change indication is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1033). When the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation command (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). and MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 108, the MODE part is decorated with a special figure 1 interruption command (A
5413) and the decoration special figure 1 resume command (A7311), the production control device 30
0 may execute a process of interrupting or restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. MO
When the DE part represents information indicating that a V prize has been won (such as a specific area passing command), the effect control device 300 may notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) described above will be described. FIG. 109 shows the production control device 30
0 is a flow chart showing the procedure of pattern-based command processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, the table is used for each MODE, and the design type is set. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the symbol types are a winning symbol, a 16R probability variation big hit symbol, a 2R probability variation big hit symbol, a 16R normal jackpot symbol, and the like.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) described above will be described. FIG. 110 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable command processing executed by .0.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and the number of times of the read-ahead effect of the continuous notice effect (remaining number of times of the continuous notice effect) is not 0 -1 updated (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 110) described above will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B200
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Effect control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a change without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a change with reach, the number of points of the effect point, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and a first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, the setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to the second half advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2007), and the variable command The address of the second half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the change time and main reach content from the change command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value (probability setting value, setting) is determined (B2012). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decoration special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variable effect such as the ready-to-win effect and the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of setting suggestion effect (B2014). Perform display settings for variable effects such as ready-to-win effects (B2015), and perform display settings for advance notice effects (B20
16). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set, for example, the display that the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced, and the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift Corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

It should be noted that the voice number and decoration number can be set not only based on the content of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to a set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can select from the lighting mode of the decoration device, that is, the lighting mode of the decoration light-emitting portion (LED).
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of .

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), the display setting of the 4th design variation related to the 4th special design (4th design, identification information) is performed in addition to the 1st to 3rd special designs (B2020). In addition, the fourth pattern variation is the display device 41
The lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the above, and/or
It is displayed on the display device 41 .

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Embodiment]
According to the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled as a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be set to a state of being executed simultaneously (both) independently of each other. . Even if one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, if the other becomes a big hit, one of the variation display games can be forcibly ended with a losing result. Also, in the definite variable state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which many small hits occur due to the special figure 2 variable display game is possible. Furthermore, game control and effect control according to the probability set value can be realized.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 game machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device 38 first special variable winning device 39 second special variable winning device 40 center case 41 display device 44 board effect device 46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
93 setting key switch 100 game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
400 Power supply device 806 Grand prize winning unit 808 General prize winning unit 812 RUSH lamp 815 Sticker 817 Related information 819a Positional information 819b Positional information 820a Accessory lamp 822 Virtual line 841 Sub board box 841
841a Internal space 842 Box lower member 843 Box upper member 858 Fastening screw 859 Cover member 906a Movable member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that includes a unit having a decorative part and generates a special game state when a game results in a special result,
A display unit that displays the type of the special game state by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of light emitting units,
The decoration portion displays a correspondence diagram in which a lighting state diagram indicating the combination and information indicating the number of rounds of the special game state corresponding to the combination are paired ,
In the gaming machine, the correspondence diagram displays information representing the same number of rounds for a plurality of the lighting state diagrams showing the different combinations.

Images